Part Number 60-40 Configuration & Calibration Software

Part Number 60-40
Revision B
START-UP, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE
Total System
Configuration & Calibration
Software
Version 3.10
Manufacturers of Precision Instruments
Printed in U.S.A. March 31, 1993

List of Effective Pages
Manual 6040 Revision B Contains 258 Pages as Follows:
Cover.. ......................................................... Mar 1993

A throu h C.. ............................................... Mar 1993
i througa xiv.. ............................................... Mar 1993
l-l through l-2 ............................................ Mar 1993
2-l through 2-4.. .......................................... Mar 1993
.............................................................................................................................
AJ& ;;s;
;::
g-2 through 3-4.. ;,I$ ;!33;
- .............. ...........................................................................................
3-6 through 3-8.. .......................................... Aug 1992
3-9 through 3-12.. ........................................ Mar 1993
4-1 through 4-8.. .......................................... Aug 1992
5-l through 5-18.. ........................................ Aug 1992
7; through 6-l 2.. ........................................ Aug 1992
..............................................................
. .............................................................. 22 ix::
;I: through 7-4 ............................................ Aug 1992
7-5 through 7-6.. .......................................... Mar 1993
7-7 through 7-22.. ........................................ Aug 1992
8-l through 8-4.. .......................................... Mar 1993
8-5 through 8-16.. ........................................ Aug 1992
9-l through 9-3.. .......................................... Mar 1993
9-4 through 9-28.. ........................................ Aug 1992
10-l through 10-3.. ...................................... Mar 1993
1O-4 through 1 O-22...................................... Aug 1992
1 l-l through 11-22.. .................................... Mar 1993
12-1 through 12-10.. .................................... Aug 1992
13-1 through 13-8.. ...................................... Aug 1992
14-1 through 14-2.. ...................................... Aug 1992
15-1 through 15-4.. ...................................... Aug 1992
A-l through A-4.. ......................................... Aug 1992
B-l through B-12.. ....................................... Aug 1992
C-l through C-4 .......................................... Aug 1992
D-l through D-16 ........................................ Mar 1993
E-l through E-14.. ....................................... Mar 1993
All product, brand or trade names used in this pubkation are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
A March 31,1993
M/D TOTCO
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
Proper service and repair is important to the safe, reliable operation of all M/D TOTCO
equipment. The service procedures recommended by MID TOTCO and described in the technical
manuals are recommended methods of performing service operations. Some of these service
operations require the use of tools specially designed for the purpose. The special tools should
be used when and as recommended. It is important to note that some warnings against the use
of specific service methods that can damage the equipment or render it unsafe are stated in the
manuals. It is also important to understand these warnings are not exclusive. M/D TOTCO could
not possibly know, evaluate and advise the service people of all conceivable ways in which
service might be done or of possible hazardous consequences of each way. Accordingly, anyone
who uses service procedures or tools which are not recommended by M/D TOTCO must first
satisfy themselves thoroughly that neither personnel safety or equipment safety will be
jeopardized by the method selected.
Maf’ch31,1993
M/D TOTCO
LI PRODUCT
WARRANTY
THE FOLLOWING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT BY WAY OF
LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. MID TOTCO warrants to each original retail purchaser ( of new
products manufactured by M/D TOTCO that such products are, at the time of delivery to the
Purchaser, free of material and workmanship defects, provided that no warranty is made with
respect to: (a) Any product which has been repaired or altered in such a way, in M/D TOTCOb
judgment, as to affect the product adversely. (b) Any product which has, in MID TOTCO
judgment, been subject to negligence, accident or improper storage. (c) Any product which has
not been operated and maintained in accordance with normal practice and with the
recommendations of M/D TOTCO. (d) All items made by others which are supplied by M/D
TOTCO on special order. The items covered in (d) above are not manufactured by MID TOTCO
and any claims should be submitted directly to the manufacturer thereof. M/D TOTCO
obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing or, at its option, replacing, during normal
business hours at any authorized service facility of MID TOTCO, any products which in its
judgment proved not to be as warranted within the applicable warranty period. All costs of
transportation of products claimed not to be as warranted and of repaired or replacement
products to or from such service facility shall be borne by the Purchaser. M/D TOTCO may
require the return of any part claimed not to be as warranted to one of Is facilities as designated
by M/D TOTCO, transportation prepaid by the Purchaser, to establish a claim under this warranty.
The cost of labor for installing a repaired or replacement part shall be borne by the Purchaser.
Replacement parts provided under the terms of this warranty are warranted for the remainder of
the warranty period of the product upon which installed to the same extent as if such parts were
original components thereof. The warranty periods for various products are: (a) Hydraulics and
Mechanical equipment: one (1) year from date of installation or 15 months from date of shipment
from M/D TOTCO, whichever occurs first. (b) All Elastomer Diaphragms: six (6) months from
date of shipment from MID TOTCO. (c) Electronic Equipment: six (6) months from date of
shipment from RAIDTOTCO.
C Mamh31,1993
M/D TOTCO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph/TM0 Page
CHAPTER ONE - INTRODUCTION

l-l PURPOSE OF MANUAL. ......................................... l-l
1-2 SCOPE OF MANUAL ............................................ l-l
l-3 INTENDED AUDIENCE .......................................... l-2
1-4 NOTES, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ............................. 1-2
1-5 RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................................ l-2
CHAPTER TWO - TOTAL SYSTEM OVERVIEW

2-1 INTRODUCTION. ............................................... 2-1
2-2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ............................................ 2-1
2-2-l System Data Acquisition Unit (System DAQ) ....................... 2-2
2-2-2 Slave DAQ .................................................. 2-2
2-2-3 Visulogger XC Graphics Display (VXC) ............................ 2-2
2-2-4 PC Workstation (PCW) ........................................ 2-2
2-2-5 T-POT Interface Module (TIM) ................................... 23
2-2-6 DACVSPECTRUM Interface (DSI) ................................ 2-3
2-2-7 T-POTNetwork .............................................. 2-3
2-3 TOTAL SYSTEM DEVICE DISTRIBUTION ........................... 2-3
CHAPTER THREE - DESCRIPTION

3-1 INTRODUCTION.. .............................................. 3-l
3-2 CONTENTS OF CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION SOFlWARE ..... 3-l
3-3 CONFIGURATION MODULES ..................................... 3-1
3-4 MASTER FILES ................................................ 3-l
3-4-l System Master Files .......................................... 3-2
3-4-2 The MASTERCHN File ........................................ 3-3
3-4-3 The MASTERSEN File ........................................ 3-4
3-4-4 The MASTEROUT File ......................................... 3-4
3-4-5 The MASTERCAL File ........................................ 3-4
3-4-6 Device Master Files ........................................... 3-5
3-4-7 The MASTER. T10 File ......................................... 3-5
3-4-8 The MASTER.020 File ......................................... 3-5
March 31,1993 i
M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATlON
Table of CoMeMs MANUAL 6040
.
Paragraph/Title Page
3-4-9 The MASTER.030 File ......................................... 3-6

3-5 DATA FILES ................................................... 3-6
3-5-l System Data Files ............................................ 3-6
3-5-2 Device Data Files ............................................. 3-6
3-6 DAQ SOFTWARE DEFAULT CHANNELS ............................ 3-8
3-7 PROGRAM SUMMARY .......................................... 3-8
3-8 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR CONFIGURING &CALIBRATING
ANEWSYSTEM ........................................... ..3- 9
CHAPTER FOUR - START-UP

4-l INTRODUCTION ................................................ 4-1
4-2 HARDWARE DEFAULTS AND COMMAND MODIFIERS ................ 4-1
4-3 THE CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION MAIN MENU .............. 4-3
4-4 THE DIAGNOSTICS F-KEY MENU ................................. 4-4
4-5 HOW TO SELECT ITEMS FROM SCREENS ......................... 4-4
4-6 HOW TO EXIT A SCREEN ........................................ 4-4
4-7 HOW TO SELECT ITEMS FROM SUBMENUS ........................ 4-4
4-8 RECOMMENDED START-UP PROCEDURE ......................... 4-5
4-8-l Step 1: Laptop Setup and Initialization Procedure .................... 45
4-8-2 Alternate Step 1: Daqless Setup and Initialization Procedure ........... 4-7
48-3 Step 2: Sensor Input Check ..................................... 48
4-8-4 Step3: LoadFiles ......................................... ...48
CHAPTER FIVE - FLOPPY/DISK
5-l INTRODUCTION ................................................ 5-l

5-2 FLOPPY/DISK OPTIONS ......................................... 5-l
5-3 LOADALL .................................................. ..5- 2
5-4 LOADCAL .................................................. ..5- 5
5-5 LOAD .................................................. ..5- 7
5-5-l Load System Configuration ..................................... 5-7
5-5-2 Load Device Configuration ..................................... 5-10
5-6 SAVEALL ................................................. ..5-13
5-7 SAVECAL ................................................. ..5-15
5-8 SAVE ................................................. ..5-16
5-8-l Save System Configuration .................................... 5-16
5-8-2 Save Device Configuration .................................... 5-18
II Match 31,1993
WD TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
MANUAL 60-40 Table of Contents
CHAPTER SIX - DIAGNOSTICS

6-l INTRODUCTION ................................................ 6-l

6-2 THE DIAGNOSTICS F-KEY MENU ................................. 6-1
6-3 THE DIAGNOSTICS MENU ....................................... 6-2
6-4 SOFTWARE VERSIONS ......................................... 6-2
6-4-l The UNIT # VERS. Channel .................................... 6-3
6-4-2 View DCM Software Version Number ............................. 6-3
6-5 INPUTS (RAW VALUES) ......................................... 6-4
6-6 INPUTS (ENGINEERING UNITS) ................................... 6-5
6-7 CHANNEL VALUES ............................................. 6-6
6-8 DIGITAL I/O CONNECTIONS ...................................... 6-7
6-9 ANALOG CONNECTIONS ........................................ 6-8
6-10 DAQ ERROR COUNTS SCREEN .................................. 6-9
6-1 O-l DAQ ERROR COUNTS Screen Fields ........................... 6-10
6-l 1 DEBUG ................................................. ..6-11
CHAPTER SEVEN - INITIAL SYSTEWDAQ CONFlGURATlON

7-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................ 7-1
7-2 THE SYSTEMIDAQ CONFIGURATION MENU ........................ 7-l
7-3 CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT CONFIGURATION .................. 7-4
7-3-l The System Channel List ....................................... 74
7-3-2 Required System Channels ..................................... 7-5
7-3-3 Logical Channel Numbers ...................................... 75
7-3-4 Channel Configuration Worksheet ................................ 7-5
7-3-5 ADDChannels ................................... ..‘.......... 7-5
7-3-6 DELETE Channels ............................................ 7-6
7-3-7 CLEAR the System Channels List ................................ 7-6
7-3-8 EDIT Channel, Sensor 8 Output Configurations .................... 7-6
7-3-9 How to Edit a Channel Configuration ............................. 7-7
7-3-l 0 Channel Configuration Screen Fields ............................ 7-8
7-3-l 1 ADD + EDIT Channels ........................................ 7-13
7-4 RIG ACTIVITY STRING CONFIGURATION .......................... 7-13
7-4-l RigActivity.. ............................................. ..7-13
7-4-2 Rig Activity String ............................................ 7-13
7-4-3 HowtoEdittheRigActivttString ............................... 7-14
7-5 ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION .................................. 7-15
7-5-l EDIT Algorithms ............................................. 7-15
March 31.1993 II
M/D TOTCO
Table of Contents MANUAL 6Wg
Paragraph/TM Page
7-5-2 Delete Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................ 7-15

7-5-3 Insert Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................ 7-16
7-5-4 ADD + EDIT Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................ 7-18
7-5-5 DELETE Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................ 7-19
7-6 TEN POINT TABLE CONFIGURATION . . . ........................ 7-20
7-6-l Create a Ten Point Table . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................ 7-20
7-7 EXITING SYSTEMIDAQ CONFIGURATION ........................ 7-21
CHAPTER EIGHT - INlTlAL TlM CONFlGURATlON
8-l lNTRODUCTlON................................................8- 1
8-2 THE TIM MASTER FILE .......................................... 8-l
8-3 TIM DEVICE ID’S ............................................... 8-l
8-4 ADD/DELETE DEVICES .......................................... 8-3
8-5 THE TIM CONFIGURATION MENU ................................. 8-4
8-6 DEVICE CHANNEL CONFIGURATION .............................. 8-5
8-6-l TIM Channel List ............................................. 8-5
8-6-2 TIM Required Channels ........................................ 8-5
8-6-3 Device-Speck Channel (XXXXXX.CcHN) .......................... 8-6
8-6-4 ADDChannels.. ........................................... ..8- 7
8-6-5 DELETE Channels ............................................ 8-7
8-6-6 EDIT Device Channel Configuration .............................. 88
8-6-7 How to Edit a Device Channel Configuration ....................... 8-9
8-6-8 Device Channel Configuration Screen Fields ..................... 8-9
8-6-9 ADD + EDIT Channels ......................................... 8-9
8-7 PRINT/PLOT CONFIGURATION ................................... 8-10
8-7-l PlotTypes ............................................... ..8-10
8-7-2 ThePbtHeader.............................................8-10
8-7-3 Pbtscales.................................................8-10
8-7-4 Alarmlndicators.............................................8-12
8-7-5 EDIT Pbt Configurations ...................................... 8-12
8-7-6 How to Edit a Print/plot Configuration ........................... 8-13
8-7-7 Prirtt/Pbt Configuration Screen Fields ........................... 8-13
8-7-8 ADDPbts ............................................... ..8-15
8-7-9 DELETE Pbts .................. : ........................... 8-16
88 EXITING TIM CONFIGURATION .................................. 8-16
Iv March 31,1993
MID TOTCO
MANUAL 6040 Table of Contents
Paragraphmtia Page
CHAPTER NINE - INlTlAL VXC CONFlGURATlON
9-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................ 9-1

9-2 VXC DEVICE ID’s ............................................... 9-1
9-3 ADD/DELETE DEVICES .......................................... 9-1
9-4 THE VXC CONFIGURATION SCREEN .............................. 9-4
9-5 DEVICE CHANNEL CONFIGURATION .............................. 9-5
9-5-l VXCChannelList ............................................. 9-5
9-5-2 VXC Required Channels ....................................... 9-5
9-5-3 Device-Specific Channel (XXXXXX.CHN) .......................... 9-6
9-5-4 InternalChannel .............................................. 9-7
9-5-5 ADDChannels ............................................... 9-7
9-5-6 DELETE Channels ............................................ 9-8
9-5-7 EDIT Device Channel Configuration .............................. 98
9-5-8 How to Edit a Device Channel Configuration ....................... 9-9
9-5-9 Device Channel Configuration Screen Fields ...................... 9-9
9-5-l 0 ADD + EDIT Channels ........................................ 9-10
9-6 DEVICE SCREEN CONFIGURATION .............................. 9-l 1
9-6-l VXCScreenTypes ........................................ ..9-11
9-6-2 The NO STRIP CHARTS Screen ................................ 9-12
9-6-3 The ONE STRIP CHART Screen ................................ 9-13
9-6-4 The TWO STRIP CHARTS Screen .............................. 9-14
9-6-5 The THREE STRIP CHARTS Screen ............................ 9-15
9-6-6 The X-Y CHART Screen ...................................... 9-16
9-6-7 The FIVE STRIP CHARTS Screen‘ .............................. 9-17
9-6-8 OperationLevel ........................................... ..9-18
9-6-9 PrimaryChannel .......................................... ..9-18
9-6-l 0 EDIT Screen Configurations ......................... : ......... 9-19
9-6-l 1 How to Edtt a VXC Screen Configuration ........................ 9-20
9-6-l 2 VXC Screen Configuration Fields .............................. 9-20
9-6-13 ADD Screens ............................................... 9-22
9-6-l 4 DELETE Screens ............................................ 9-23
9-7 DEVICE RECORDER CONFIGURATION ........................... 9-24
9-7- 1 EDIT Recorder Configuration ................................... 9-24
9-7-2 How to Edit a VXC Recorder Configuration ....................... 9-25
9-7-3 VXC Recorder Configuration Fields ............................. 9-25
9-7-4 ADD Recorders ............................................. 9-26
9-7-5 DELETE Recorders .......................................... 9-26
9-8 EXITING VXC CONFIGURATION ................................. 9-27
March 31,1993 V
M/D TOTCO
Table of Contents MANUAL 6Mg
Paragraph/TM
CHAPTER TEN - INITIAL PCW CONFlGURATlON
10-l INTRODUCTION ............................................... 10-l

10-2 PCW DEVICE ID ............................................. 10-l
10-3 ADD/DELETE DEVICES ......................................... 10-l
10-4 THE PCW CONFIGURATION SCREEN ............................ 10-4
1 o-5 DEVICE CHANNEL CONFIGURATION ............................. 10-5
1o-5-1 PCW Channel List ........................................... 10-5
1O-5-2 PCW Channel Requirements ................................... 1O-5
1 o-5-3 Device-Specific Channel (XXXXXX.CHN) ......................... 1O-6
1 o-5-4 ADDChannels.. ............................................ lo- 7
1o-5-5 DELETEChannels...........................................lO 8
1O-5-6 EDIT Device Channel Configuration ............................. 1O-8
1 o-5-7 How to Edit a Device Channel Configuration ...................... 1O-9
1O-5-8 Device Channel Configuration Screen Fields ..................... 1O-9
10-5-9 ADD + EDIT Channels ..... 1 ................................. lo-10
1 O-6 DEVICE SCREEN CONFIGURATION ............................. 10-l 1
1o-6-1 PCWScreenTypes ....................................... ..lO-11
1o-6-2 TWO STRIP 5 ALPHA Screen ................................. lo-11
1o-6-3 TWO STRIP 9 ALPHA Screen ................................. lo-12
1o-6-4 FIVE STRIP CHARTS Screen ................................. lo-12
1O-6-5 EDIT Screen Configurations .................................. 1O-13
1O-6-6 How to Edit a PCW Screen Configuration ....................... lo-14
1o-6-7 PCW Screen Configuration Fields ............................. lo-14
1c 3 ADDScreens.. ............................................ 10-l 5
1c 3 DELETEScreens...........................................10-16
1 O-7. PLOT CONFIGURATION .............................. ; ........ 1O-l 7
1o-7-1 EDIT Pbt Configurations ..................................... 1O-l 7
1O-7-2 How to Edit a PCW Pbt Configuration ........................... lo-18
1o-7-3 r taxi> -ation& :il Fields ............................... lo-18
1 o-7-4 ADDPbts .............................................. .. lO-2 1
1o-7-5 DELETE Pbts ............................................. 1 O-21
10-8 EXITING PLOT CONFIGURATION ............................... 1O-22
CHAPTER ELEVEN - INlTlAL DSI CONFlGURATlON
11-l lNTRODUCnON...............................................ll- 1
11-2 PRE-ASSIGNED DSI CHANNELS ................................. 1 l-l
11-3 SPECTRUM-TYPE PANEL DISPLAYS ............................. 1 l-3
VI March 31,1993
M/D TOTCO
Paragraph/TM Page
11-4 SPECTRUM CHANNEL CONFIGURATIONS ........................ 11-4

11-5 SPECTRUM FUNCTION CODES .................................. 11-4
11-6 DSI DEVICE ID’S .............................................. 11-4
11-7 ADD/DELETE DEVICES ......................................... 11-5
11-8 DSI CONFIGURATION MASTER LISTS ............................ 11-6
11-9 THE DSI CONFIGURATION SCREEN .............................. 11-7
1 l-10 DEVICE CHANNEL CONFIGURATION ............................. 11-8
1 l-10-1 ADDChannels .......................................... 11-8
11-10-2 DELETE Channels ....................................... 118
11-10-3 EDIT Device Channel Configuration ........................ 1 l-l 0
1 l-l o-3-1 Device Channel Configuration Screen Fields .............. 1 l-1 0
11-10-4 ADD + EDITChannels ................................... 11-11
11-11 DEVICE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION ........................... 11-11
11-11-l ADD Device Functions ................................... 11-12
11-11-2 DELETE Device Functions ................................ 11-12
11-11-3 EDIT Device Functions .................................. 11-13
11-11-3-1 Device Function Configuration Screen Fields .............. 1 l-14
11-11-3-2 FunctionTypes ..................................... 11-l 4
11-11-4 ADD + EDIT Device Functions. ............................ 11-17
11-12 EXITING DSI CONFIGURATION ................................. 11-18
CHAPTER TWELVE - CALIBRATION
12-1 INTRODUCTION ............................................... 12-1

12-2 THE CALIBRATION MENU ...................................... 12-1
12-3 ANALOG CHANNEL CALIBRATION ............................... 12-2
12-4 DIGITAL CHANNEL CALIBRATION ................................ 12-8
CHAPTER THIRTEEN - MULTI-DAQ SYSTEMS
13-1 INTRODUCTtON ............................................... 13-1

13-2 SYSTEMDAQ.................................................13- 1
13-3 StAVEDAQ ................................................ ..13- 1
13-4 START-UP ................................................. ..13- 2
13-5 RECOMMENDED MULTI-DAQ PROGRAM SEQUENCE ............... 13-3
March 31,1993 Vii

M/D TOTCO
Table of Contents MANUAL 6&4g
Paragraph/TM Page
CHAPTER FOURTEEN - DAQ ACCESS
14-l lNTRODUCTlON...............................................14- 1
14-2 LOADALL ................................................. ..14- 1
14-3 SENDALL ................................................. ..14- 1
CHAPTER FIFTEEN - MAINTENANCE
15-l INTRODUCTION ............................................... 15-1

15-2 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES .................................. 15-l
APPENDIX A - DAQ CHANNEL WORKSHEET
A-l INTRODUCTION ................................................ A-l
APPENDIX B - MASTER CHANNEL LISTS
B-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................ B-l
APPENDIX C - ALGORITHM MASTER LIST
C-l lNTRODUCTlON................................................C- 1
APPENDIX D - DRILLOFF CONFlGURATlON
D-l lNTRODUCTlON................................................D- 1
D-2 PURPOSE .................................................. ..D- 1
D-3 MEI-HOD .................................................. ..D- 1
D-4 THE DRILLOFF SCREEN ......................................... D-3
D-5 ME DRILLOFF MASTER FILE .................................... D-3
D-6 DRILLOFF SETUP & CONFIGURATION: NEW TOTAL SYSTEM
INSTALLATION ............................................ ..D- 5
D-7 DRILLOFF SETUP & CONFIGURATION: ADDING DRILLOFF TO AN
EXISTING TOTAL SYSTEM .................................... D-9
D-8 DRILLOFF RECORDER CONFIGURATIONS ........................ D-13
D-9 DRILLOFF SCREEN CONFIGURATION ............................ D-15
VIII March 31,1993

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 60-40 Table of Contents
APPENDIX E - SPECTRUM FUNCTION TYPES
E-l INTRODUCTION ................................................ E-l

E-2 FUNCTION CODES ............................................. E-l
E-2-l FunctionTypes ............................................ ..E- 1
E-2-2 RelatedChannels ............................................ E-2
E-3 CATEGORY 1 FUNCTION TYPES .......... ; ....................... E-3
E-3-l Enable/Disable Channel ....................................... E-3
E-3-2 Change Rig Mode ............................................ E-3
E-3-3 Change Gears ............................................. ..E 4
E-3-4 ChangeFields ............................................. ..E 4
E-3-5 Select One of Two Channels .................................... E-6
E-3-6 Disable/Zero Channel ......................................... E-6
E-3-7 ZeroChannelValue ......................................... ..E- 7
E-3-6 SelectDrillrrrip...............................................E- 7
E-3-9 SelectTD/RT .............................................. ..E B
E-3-10 StartROP...................................................E- 9
E-3-1 1 BacklightingOnKIff ......................................... ..E- 9
E-3-l 2 Ack Depth Alarm ............................................ E-l 1
E-4 CATEGORY 2 FUNCTION TYPES ................................. E-l 1
E-5 CATEGORY 3 FUNCTION TYPES ................................. E-l 1
E-5-l Set Meter Full Scale Value .................................... E-11
E-5-2 Set Active Pit/Reserve Pit/Trip Tank On/Off ....................... E-12
E-5-3 Sel Active Pit Volume ......................................... E-l 2
E-5-4 Sel Trip Tank Volume ........................................ E-13
E-5-5 Set Lines Strung ............................................ E-13
E-5-6 Set Time/Set Date ........................................... E-13
March 31,1993 IX
M/D TOTCO
LIST
OFFI
Flgure/lltle Page
2-l TOTAL System Overview ......................................... 2-1
3-l Master Files, Data Files & Configuration Modules ...................... 3-7
3-2 Initial Configuration and Calibration Procedure ........................ 3-10
4-1 Default/Command Modifier Screen .................................. 4-2

4-2 Configuration and Calibration Main Menu Screen ...................... 4-3
4-3 Connecting Laptop Computer to DAQ ............................... 4-5
4-4 Software Initialization Screen ...................................... 4-6
5-l FLOPPY:[LOAD ALL] Menu Screen ................................. 5-2

5-2 FLOPPY:[LOAD CAL] Menu Screen ................................. 5-5
5-3 SYSTEMDAQ Configuration Screen - [LOAD] Submenu ................ 5-7
5-4 VXC Device Configuration Screen - [LOAD] Submenu .................. 5-10
5-5 SYSTEMIDAQ Configuration Screen - [SAVE] Submenu ................ 5-l 6
6-l DIAGNOSTICS Menu Screen ...................................... 6-2

6-2 SOFTWARE VERSIONS Screen ................................... 63
6-3 INPUTS (RAW VALUES) Screen ................................... 6-4
6-4 INPUTS (ENGINEERING UNITS) Screen ............................ 6-5
6-5 CHANNELS VALUES Screen ...................................... 6-6
6-6 DIGITAL l/O CONNECTIONS Screen ............................... 6-7
6-7 ANALOG CONNECTIONS Screen .................................. 6-8
6-8 DAQ ERROR COUNTS Screen .................................... 6-9
7-1 lnftial SystemIDAQ Configuration Procedure .......................... 7-2

7-2 [CONFIGURATION] Submenu ..................................... 7-3
7-3 SYSTEM/DAQ Configuration Screen ................................ 7-3
7-4 MASTER.C/f/U Default System Channel List .......................... 7-4
7-5 SYSTEMDAQ Channel Configuration Screen ......................... 7-7
7-6 Rig Activfty String Configuration Screen ............................. 7-14
7-7 AlgorithmScreen...............................................7-1 6
7-8 EDIT Algorithm: Insert Line Screen ..... : ........................... 7-17
7-9 [ADD + EDIV Algorithm Screen ................................... 7-18
7-10 Ten Point Table Configuration Screen .............................. 7-21
X March31,1993
M/D TOTCO
.
MANUAL 6MO Table of Contents
Figure/Title Page
8-l Initial TIM Configuration Procedure .................................. 8-2

8-2 TIM DeviceScreen .............................................. 8-3
8-3 TIM CONFIGURATION Screen .................................... 8-4
8-4 MASTERT70 Defautt Channel List .................................. 8-5
8-5 TIM-Specific Channel Configuration Screen ........................... 8-6
8-6 TIM Device Channel Configuration Screen ............................ 8-8
8-7 Typical HP Plot ............................................... 8-11
8-8 Print/Plot Configuration Screen .................................... 8-12
8-9 Default Print/Plot Configuration Screen ............................. 8-15
9-l Initial VXC Configuration Procedure ................................. 9-2

9-2 VXC Device Screen ............................................. 9-3
9-3 VXC CONFIGURATION Screen .................................... 9-4
9-4 MASTER.020 Default Channel List .................................. 9-6
9-5 VXC-Specific Channel Configuration Screen .......................... 9-7
9-6 VXC Device Channel Configuration Screen ........................... 9-8
9-7 NO STRIP CHARTS Screen ...................................... 9-12
9-8 ONE STRIP CHART Screen ...................................... 9-13
9-9 TWO STRIP CHARTS Screen .................................... 9-14
9-10 THREE STRIP CHARTS Screen .................................. 9-15
9-11 X-Y CHART Screen ............................................ 9-l 6
9-12 FIVE STRIP CHARTS Screen .................................... 9-17
9-13 VXC Screen Configuration Screen ................................. 9-19
9-l 4 SCREEN MODE CONFIGURATION Screen ......................... 9-21
9-15 SCREEN MODE CONFIGURATION Screen: Submenu ................ 9-21
9-l 6 Default VXC Screen Configuration Screen ........................... 9-22
9-l 7 VXC Recorder Configuration Screen ............................... 9-24
1 o-1 Initial PCW Configuration Procedure ............................... 1O-2

1o-2 PCW Device Screen ............................................ 10-3
1o-3 PCW CONFIGURATION Screen .................................. 1O-4
1o-4 MASTER.030 Default Channel List ................................. 1O-6
1o-5 PCW-Specific Channel Configuration Screen ......................... 1O-7
1O-6 PCW Device Channel Configuration Screen .......................... 1O-8
1o-7 TWO STRIP 5 ALPHA Screen ................................... 10-l 1
10-8 TWO STRIP 9 ALPHA Screen ....... .I .......................... lo-12
1o-9 FIVE STRIP CHARTS Screen ................................... 1O-l 2
10-10 PCW Screen Configuration Screen ................................ 1O-13
10-11 Default PCW Screen Configuration Screen ......................... 1O-l 5
March 31,1993 Xi
M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATlON
Table of Contents MANUAL 6&4g
FlgureiTltle Page
10-12 THREE-COLUMN Plot Configuration Screen ........................ 10-l 7

10-13 SEVEN-COLUMN Plot Configuration Screen ........................ lo-18
10-14 THREE-COLUMN PCW Plot ..................................... lo-19
10-15 SEVEN-COLUMN PCW Plot ..................................... lo-20
11-l DSI Configuration Procedure ..................................... 11-2

11-2 Bar Graphs and Meters: SPECTRUM-Type Displays ................... 1 l-3
11-3 Defauft DSI Device Screen ....................................... 1 l-5
11-4 DSI CONFIGURATION Screen .................................... 1 l-7
11-5 DSI DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] Submenu .......................... 11-9
11-6 DSI Device Channel Configuration Screen ........................... 1 l-9
11-7 DSI DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [ADD] Submenu ........................ 11-12
11-8 DSI Device Function Configuration Screen .......................... 1 l-13
11-9 Sample: System DAQ Channel Configuration Master List .............. 1 l-1 9
11-10 Sample: SPECTRUM Channel Configuration Master List .............. 1 l-20
11-11 Sample: SPECTRUM Function Code Master List .................... 11-21
12-l SYSTEM CALIBRATION SOFTWARE Screen ........................ 12-l

12-2 Analog Calibration Screen ....................................... 12-2
12-3 Raw Minimum Calibration Screen .................................. 12-3
12-4 Value Minimum Calibration Screen ................................. 12-4
12-5 Raw Maxinwm Calibration Screen ................................. 12-5
12-6 Value Maximum Calibration Screen ................................ 12-7
12-7 Digital Cafiiration Screen ........................................ 12-9
13-1 SYSTEMDAQ Channel Configuration Screen ......................... 13-3

13-2 SLAVE DAQ Device Screen ...................................... 13-4
13-3 Recommended Program Sequence at Slave DAQ ..................... 13-6
13-4 Slave DAQ Channel Configuration Screen ........................... 13-7
14-1 How to Use DAQ ACCESS Options ................................ 14-2
15-1 Maintenance Procedure: Add/Delete Channels ....................... 15-2

15-2 Maintenance Procedure: Add a VXC Device ......................... 153
15-3 Maintenance Procedure: Calibrate a New Sensor ..................... 15-4
D-l DRILLOFF Configuration Overview ................................. D-2

D-2 Typical DRILLOFF Screen ........................................ D-3
D-3 Default DRILLOFF Recorder Configuration Screen: 30K CHART ......... D-14
XII R&uch31,1993
M/D TOTCO
Figurerntle Page
D-4 Defauft DRILLOFF Recorder Configuration Screen: 60K CHART ......... D-15
D-5 Defauft DRILLOFF Screen Configuration Screen ...................... D-16
E-l Logic: “Change Gears” Function Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

E-2 Logic: “Start ROP” Function Type: ROP FT/HR and ROP MIN/FT
Share a Display Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-l 0
March31,1993 Xiii
M/D TOTCO
LIST
OFTABLES
Table/Title Page
2-1 TOTAL System Device Distribution .................................. 2-3
3-1 Configuration & Calibration Files .................................... 3-2

3-2 Master File Defautt Channels ...................................... 3-3
3-3 DAQ Default Channels/Logical Channel Numbers ...................... 3-8
5-l FLOPPY/DISK Options ........................................... 5-l
6-1 DIAGNOSTICS F-Key Summary ................................... 6-l
7-l Summary of Sensor Types ....................................... 7-10

7-2 How to Use Channel Active Options ................................ 7-11
7-3 Summary of DAQ Output Types ................................... 7-11
8-l Plot Configuration Update Events and Update Intervals ................. 8-14
9-1 VXCScreenTypes ........................................... ..9-11
10-l PCWScreenTypes............................................lO-ll
11-l Pre-Assigned DSI Channels ...................................... 1 l-1

11-2 DSIFunctionTypes............................................ll-l 4
13-l Summary of Multi-DAQ Processes .................................. 13-2

13-2 DAQ Dip Switch 2 Settings ....................................... 13-2
B-l ChannelDescriptions .......................................... ..B- 1

B-2 Master Channel List ............................................. B-7
c-1 Algorithm Master List ............................................ C-l
D-l Required DRILLOFF Channels ...................................... D-4

D-2 MASTERDO Screen & Recorder Configurations ....................... D-5
D-3 Recorder Configuration Summary ..................... ........... D-l 4
E-l Active Flags and Manual Values for Select Drill/Trip ...... ............. E-9
XIV Match 31,1993

M/D TOTCO
CHAPTER ONE
INTRODUCTION
l-1 PURPOSE OF MANUAL
This manual contains start-up, configuration, calibration and maintenance instructions for the
TOTAL Configuration and Calibration software, Version 3.10. This software is used to configure
the TOTAL (M/D TOTCO Advanced Data Logging) system and calibrate its sensors.
1-2 SCOPE OF MANUAL
This manual is divided into the following chapters:
[7 Chapter One - introduction to manual.
0 Chapter TLVO- overview of the TOTAL system.
0 Chapter Three - contents description of the Configuration and Calibration

software, including master files, executable files and defauft
configurations; summary of the software’s functions: general procedure for initial
configuration and calibration of a new system.
0 Chapter Four - instructions for setting up and initializing the Configuration and
Calibration software, checking sensor inputs, viewing hardware defaults,
selecting items from screens and lists.
0 Chapter Five - procedures for loading configuration and calibration files from
floppy or from the hard drive and saving them to floppy or to the hard drive.
0 Chapter Six - procedures for using DIAGNOSTICS and the F-keys to view
software version numbers, raw and processed data values and analog/digital
connector assignments.
0 Chapter Seven - initial System/DAQ configuration.
q Chapter Eight - initial T-POT Interface Module (TIM) configuration.
0 Chapter Nine - initial Visulogger XC Graphics Display (VXC) configuration.
0 Chapter Ten - initial PC Workstation (PCW) configuration.
0 Chapter Eleven - initial DAQBPECTRUM Interface (DSI) configuration.
[7 Chapter Twelve - sensor channel calibration.
0 Chapter Thirteen - configuration and calibration of multi-DAQ systems.
0 Chapter Fourteen - procedures for using DAQ ACCESS to send

configuration/calibration information to the DAQ and retrieve it from the DAQ
0 Chapter Fifteen - maintenance procedures for TOTAL system updates.
[7 Appendix A - DAQ Channel Worksheet, used to record connector assignments

prior to configuration and calibration.
March 31,1993 Page l-1

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 1 CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
INTRODUCTlON MANUAL 6&4g
c] Appendix B - Two master channel lists: Table S-l de! each channel; for
each channel, Table S-2 lists the default sensor t algorithm and
channels that must be configured in order to use Tt e da ; ‘algorithm.
0 Appendix C - a table listing all available algorithms, their required configured

channels and the channels that use each algorithm.
0 Appendix D - DRILLOFF configuration.
[7 Appendix E - detailed description of SPECTRUM function types.
1-3 INTENDED AUDIENCE

This manual is intended for use by field engineering, maintenance, operation and repair
personnel.
1-4 NOTES, CAUTlONS AND WARNINGS

Notes, cautions and warnings are presented, when applicable, to aid in understanding and
operating the equipment or to protect personnel and equipment. Examples and explanations for
each are presented below.
NOTE
Provides additional information to aid in understanding the current topic.
CAUTION
Provides information to prevent equipment malfunction or damage that
could result in interruption of senrice.
WARNING
Provides information to prevent equipment malfunction or damage that
could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel or major property loss.
l-5 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Information for installing, operating and troubleshooting the devices that make up a TOTAL
system is presented in separate manuals, as follows:
. Manual 60-l 0: Data Acquisition Unit (DAQ) and Sensors
l Manual 60-20: Wsulogger XC Graphics Display (VXC)
l Manual 60-50: DACWPECTRUM Interface (DSI)
Page l-2 March31,1993

M/D TOTCO
CHAPTER TWO
TOTAL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2-1 INTRODUCTiON
This chapter contains an overview of the TOTAL system and a description of the devices that
make up the system.
2-2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TOTAL is a modular instrumentation system composed of up to ten, independent devices that

monitor, record, display and print drilling data. The individual system devices are linked via a
communications network, called T-POT
A typical TOTAL system is shown in Figure 2-l. It consists of six devices: System DAQ, Slave
DAQ, Visulogger XC Graphics Display (VXC)*, PC Workstation (PCW)**, T-POT Interface Module
(TIM) and DAQBPECTRUM Interface (DSI). These devices and the T-POT network are
described in Paragraphs 2-2-l through 2-2-7.
Rig Sensors Rig Sensors
I I
sdz ’ts%irn
I
/ Slave
Monitor I-EICI
I I I I
T-POT Network’
\.-,,,
Figure 2-l. TOTAL System Overview
l The Visulogger XC Graphics Display is also referred to as the CRT Interactive Device (CID).
l * The PC Workstation is also referred to as the Display Control Module (DCM).
March 31,1993 Page 2-l

M/D TOTCO
TOTAL SYSTEM OVERVIEW MANUAL 6&40
2-2-l System Data Acqulsltlon Unit (System DAQ)

The System DAQ is the primary device in any TOTAL system. It has four main functions:
. receives and processes raw data from up to 23 analog and 14 digital sensors and
places the processed data on the T-POT network for access by system devices
. communicates with the system devices to send and receive data
. prr;id;itput to drive up to 14 instruments, such as chart recorders, meters, relays
. maintains all configuration and calibration information in non-volatile memory

Chapter Seven contains the recommended procedure for initial System DAQ configuration.
2-2-2 Slave DAQ

Slave DAQs are used if the 23 analog sensors and/or 14 digital input/output connectors of the
System DAQ are not adequate. Slave DAQs gather and process raw sensor data and place the
processed data, in engineering units, on the T-POT network for the System DAQ to use. This
processed data can also be used by the Slave DAQ digital connectors to drive other instruments
(i.e. chart recorders, etc.).
As Table 2-l shows, a TOTAL system can currently support up to three Slave DAQs. Refer to
Chapter 13 to configure and calibrate a system containing Slave DAQs.
2-2-3 Vlsulogger XC Grsphks Olsplsy (VXC)

The Visukgger XC Graphics Display is a monitor, with attaching keypad, used to display and
monitor sensor data. Via the keypad, the operator can select and edit display screens, set alarm
limits and control channel functions (i.e. activate/deactivate channels, zero channel values, etc.).
The keypad also controls an alarm horn that sounds when alarm limits are exceeded. Each VXC
can support three, 9- or 1e-inch slave monitors, which duplicate the VXC display.
As Table 2-l shows, a TOTAL system can currently support up to two VXCs. Chapter Nine
contains the recommended procedure for initial VXC configuration.
2-2-4 PC Workstation (PCW)

The PC Workstation is an IBM-compatible personal computer and monitor, Wi optional
printer/plotter, that is used to run the Visubgger Interface Program (VIP). With VIP, the PCW can:
. store data from the System DAQ in data files on the PC hard drive
. compare data values for each channel to user-specified alann limits
. allow DAQ data to be accessed at the rig site and at other locations (master sites)
. display current (real-time) and recorded (historical) data on the monitor and on paper
. reformat data files on the hard drive for import to spreadsheet or database
applications programs
A TOTAL system can currently support up to three PCWs (Table 2-l). Chapter Ten contains the
recommended procedure for initial PCW configuration.
Page 2-2 Match 31,1M3

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Chapter 2
MANUAL 6040 TOTAL SYSTEM OVERWEW
2-2-5 T-POT interface Module (TtM)

The TIM converts data from the DAQ into a format that a printer/plotter can read and then
forwards the formatted data to the printer/plotter. As Table 2-1 shows, a TOTAL system can
currently support up to two TIMs. Chapter Eight contains the recommended procedure for initial
TIM configuration.
2-2-6 DAQ/SPECTRUM interface (DSI)
The DSI converts data from the System DAQ into a format that can be read by a SPECTRUM
1000 display panel, SPECTRUM-type display panel (i.e. Mud Watch) or VIP software (Visulogger
Interface Program) and then forwards the formatted data to the device. It also converts data
entered by the operator using the display panel keypad and forwards the converted data to the
System DAQ. Currently, up to three DSls can be supported by a TOTAL system (Table 2-l).
Chapter Eleven contains the recommended procedure for initial DSI configuration.
2-2-7 T-POT Network
The T-POT network allows communication between the System DAQ and all other TOTAL system
devices. It is a time-division, multiplexed, single-wire, frequency-shift-keying (FSK)
communications media that uses a unique protocol developed specifically for the tasks
associated withTOTAL. Each device connected to the network has an assigned identification
number to ensure that data records are routed correctly.
2-3 TOTAL SYSTEM DEVICE DISTRIBUTION
The maximum number of devices that can currently be supported by a TOTAL system is ten. The
distribution of these devices is presented in Table 2-l.
Table 2-1. TOTAL System Device Distribution
Maximum No.
Device Type DeViCe
of Devices
I Svstem DAQ I 1 I System DAQ I
Slave DAQ 3 Slave DAQ
Printer Device 2 TIM
Display Device 3 PCW, DSI
Archive Device 2 vxc
March 31,1993 Page 2-3

M/D TOTCO
TOTAL SYSTEM OVERVIEW MANUAL 6WO
Page 2-4 Match 31,19m

M/D TOTCO
CHAPTER THREE
DESCRIPTION
3-l INTRODUCTiON
The Configuration and Calibration software is used to configure the TOTAL system and calibrate
its sensors. This chapter contains the following:
l description of the files that comprise the Configuration and Calibration software
l Configuration and Calibration System defauft channels
. DAQ software default channels
. summary of the Configuration and Calibration software functions
l general procedure for initial configuration and calibration of a new system
3-2 CONTENTS OF CONFiGURATiON AND CALIBRATION SOFiWARE
The files that comprise the Configuration and Calibration software are listed in Table 3-l. As
shown, the software consists of executable files, called cunfig~fafion modules, and data files,
called master files. These files are used to configure the TOTAL system and calibrate its sensors.
3-3 CONFIGURATION MODULES
Configuration modules are executable files that configure the TOTAL system and Is devices.
These files are identtfied by a . EXE extension. Configuration modules are automatically read into
memory and executed as needed during program operation. They cannot be modified using the
Configuration and Calibration software and, therefore, can be used to configure any TOTAL
system. As Table 3-l shows, there is a configuration module for each type of device.
CALCONEEXE is the program configuration module. It is automatically loaded when the

software is initialized with the CALCONF command (Paragraph 4-8-1, Step 5) and directs all
other configuration modules and master files (or data files), as they are loaded.
3-4 MASTER FILES
The Configuration and Calibration software master files are data files that contain default
configuration and calibration information. They are typically used as templates for configuring
and calibrating a new system or overwriting existing configurations. As Table 3-l shows, these
files are identified by the file name MASTER and a three-letter extension that describes the file’s
contents.
Master files are read into memory using one or more of the FLOPPY/DISK options (Chapter 5)
and then modified, as needed, to describe the TOTAL system. In most cases, the modified
versions of master files are saved to floppy as data files under a user-specified file name, and the
original master files are left on floppy in their unaltered form. While this is the recommended
procedure, it is possible to overwrite the original master files with the modified versions by
entering a password and saving the files to floppy under the file name MASTER. To obtain the
password, contact Field Engineering.
There are two types of master files: system master files and device master files. These files are
described in Paragraphs 3-4-l through 3-4-9.
August 7,1992 Page 3-l

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 3 CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATlON
DESCRIPTION MANUAL 6&4g
3-4-l System Master Flies

System master files contain default settings for all configuration parameters at the system level.
These files are named MASTERJCXX, where XXX is a three-letter abbreviation for the type of
configuration information contained in the file. For example, MASTERSTR contains the default
rig activity string and MASTER.CAL contains default calibration information. Table 3-1
summarizes the contents of each system master file and Paragraphs 3-4-2 through 345 detail
the contents of the more complex master files.
Table 3-l. Conflguratlon & Calibration Flies
File Name File Type Contents
CALCONF. EXE Program The main configuration module - contains the program that
Configuration Module directs all other configuration modules and data files.
-SYSTEM.EXE Configuration Module The program that configures the System DAQ.
-DAQ.EXE Configuration Module The program that configures Slave DAQs.
-TIM.EXE Configuration Module The program that configures TIMs.
-CID.EXE Configuration Module The program that configures VXCs.
-DCM.EXE Configuration Module The program that configures PCWs.
-SPT.EXE Configuration Module The program that configures DSls.
MASTERCHN System Master File Default settings to use as a template in configuring all system
channels and in designating channels as defaults.
(Paragraph 342)
MASTER.SEN System Master File Default settings for use in computing channel vafues, in
engineering units, from raw sensor data. (Paragraph 343)
MASTER.TBL System Master File Defauft values for four, ten point tables.
MASTER.STR System Master File Default rig activii string.
MASTER.ALG System Master File Algorithms available for computing channel values.
MASTER.OUT System Master File Default settings for channels typically used as output.
(Paragraph 344)
MASTER.CAL System Master File Defautt calibration data for each channel. (Paragraph 345)
MASTER.TlO’ TIM Master File Default TIM configurations. (Paragraph 347)
MASTER.020 VXC Master File Default VXC confguratbns. (Paragraph 343)
MASTER.030 PCW Master File Default PCW configurations. (Paragraph 34-9)
l The TIM default conf’ uration file (MASTER. Tla) ls not automatically baded when all other master files
are loaded. To bad de‘pault TIM configurations automatically, rename the TIM master file to MASTER.010
before initializing the Configuration and Calibration software.
Page 3-2 March 31,1W3

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 604 DESCRiPTiON
3-4-2 The hUSTER.CHN File
The MASTERXHN file contains a defauft System channel list that consists of the most wmmon
channels. This defauft channel list is provided as a template to use in configuring the system. It
is likely that you will delete channels from and add channels to this list in creating a channel list
that represents the current rig. The channels that comprise the default System channel list are
presented in Table 3-2, arranged by logical channel number (Paragraph 7-3-3).
For all assigned channels, the MASTERXHN file also contains defauft settings for the channel
configuration fields listed below. (Assigned channels are identified by channel name, i.e. FLOW
IN; unassigned channels are identified by logical channel number, i.e. CHANNEL # 003.) These
fields appear on the SYSTEM/DAQ Channel Configuration screen (Figure 7-5). For an
explanation of each field, refer to Paragraph 7-3-l 0.
. Channel Name
. Units
. Precision
. Operator can/cannot modify channel
. Operator can/cannot zero channel
. Operator can/cannot activate channel
. Channel is/is not initially inactive
. Channel can/cannot be algorithm activated
. Channel is/is not initially algorithm inactive
. Manual Value (for manual channels only)
. Manual String (for manual channels only)
Tabie 3-2. MMTERCHN Defauif Channels
HOOK LOAD (001) GAIN/LOSS (037) RIG ACTIVITY (108)

BIT WEIGHT (002) MUD VOLUME (041) DAQ VERSION (111)
DEPTH (005) PIT VOLUME 1 (042) UNIT 0 VERS. (112)
ROTARY TORQ (011) PIT VOLUME 2 (043) HORN CONTROL (117)
ROTARY RPM (012) PIT VOLUME 3 (044) DEPTH BOUNCE (128)
PUMP PRESS (016) PIT VOLUME 4 (045) DIGIT BOUNCE (129)

STROKES/FILL (020) FLOW OUT (055) PIT 1 JUMPS (130)
ACCUM/FILL (021) TRIP TANK 1 (062) PIT 2 JUMPS (131)
PUMP SPM 1 (022) ROP FT/HR (074) PIT 3 JUMPS (132)
PUMP SPM 2 (023) TIME (091) PIT 4 JUMPS (133)

PUMP COUNT 1 (032) DATE (092) MASTER.CHN (253)
PUMP COUNT 2 (033) LINES STRUNG (107)
August 7,1992 Page 3-3

M/D TOTCO
DESCRIPTION MANUAL-
3-4-3 The h&WER.SEN File

For each assigned channel, this file contains the logical channel number and default settings for
the system channel fields listed below. These fields are used to compute channel values, in
engineering units, from raw sensor values and are part of the SYSTEMDAQ Channel
Configuration screen (Figure 7-5). For an explanation of each field, refer to Paragraph 7-3-10.
. Sensor type
. Connector
9 Algorithm
l Sample rate
. Filter value
3-4-4 The MAS7ER.OU7Flle

For assigned channels whose signals are typically used to drive other instruments, this file
contains default settings for the fields listed below. These fields are part of the SYSTEMDAQ
Channel Configuration screen (Figure 7-5) for each channel designated as having an output. For
an explanation of each field, refer to Paragraph 7-3-10.
output connector number

QJW type
Low scale
High scale
Low limit
High limit
Must turn on value
Must turn off value
3-4-S The IUASTERCAL File

For each assigned channel, this file contains default settings for the system channel fields listed
below. The first four fields listed below are part of the Calibration screen for analog channels
(Figure 12-2) and the last field listed is part of the Calibration screen for digital channels (Figure
12-7). For an explanation of each field, refer to Paragraphs 12-3 and 12-4.
l Vafue minimum
. Vatue maximum
l Raw minimum
9 Raw maximum
. New calibration rate
Page 3-4 August 7,1992

W’DTOTCO
MANUAL 6&4g DESCRIPTION
34-6 Device Master Files
There is one device master file for each type of device. MASTER. T70 contains default TIM
settings; MASTER.020 contains default VXC settings and MASTER.030 contains default PCW
settings. The contents of each device master file are summarized in Table 3-l and described in
Paragraphs 3-4-7 through 3-4-9.
3-4-7 The MASTER.TlO File
MASTER. T70 contains a default TIM channel list composed of the most commonly printed
and/or plotted channels. For all assigned channels, this file also contains default values for all
TIM Channel Configuration fields (Figure 8-6) and TIM Print/Plot Configuration fields (Figure 8-8)
listed below. These defaults provide a template for TIM configuration.
TIM Channel Configuration fields TiM Print/Plot Configumtion fields

. Low bw limit . Print/Plot name
. Low limit l Channel Name
. High limit . Plot ColorrryPe
. High high limit . Print/Plot type
. Low plot scale . Update event
. High plot scale . Update interval
MASTER. TIO is not loaded when all other master files are loaded. To load the file automatically,
rename it to MASTER.070 before initializing the Configuration and Calibration software.
34-8 The MASTER.020 File

MASTER.020 contains a defauft VXC channel list composed of the most commonly displayed
channels. For all assigned channels, this file also contains defauft values for all VXC Channel
Configuration fiefds (Figure 9-6) VXC Screen Configuration fields (Figure 9-13) and VXC
Recorder Configuration fields (Figure g-17) listed below. These defaufts provide a template for
VXC configuration.
VXC Channel Configuration fields VXC Screen Configurstlon fields

. Low strip scale Screen name
. High strip scale Alpha Channel fields
. Low bar scale Chart Channel fields
. High bar scale Screen type
. Horn enabled/disabled Number of left alpha channels
. Low limit Number of right alpha channels
. High limit Recorder Basis
l Low bw limit [Set Screen Mode]
. High high limft
VXC Recorder Configuration fields

. Recorder name l Event channel
. Update every l Direction
l Channel name
March 31,1993 Page 85

M/D TOTCO
DESCRIPTION MANUAL 6090
3-4-Q The MASlER.wOFlle

The MASTER.030 file contains a default PCW channel list composed of the most commonly
displayed channels. For all assigned channels, this file also contains defauft vafues for all PCW
Channel Configuration fields (Figure 1O-6), PCW Screen Configuration fields (Figure 1O-l 0) and
PCW Plot Configuration fiekfs (Figures lo-12 and 10-13) listed below. These defaults provide a
template for PCW configuration.
PCW Channel Configuration fields PCW Screen Configuration flelds
. Low scale 9 Screen name
. High scale l Alpha Channel fields
. Low plot scale l Chart Channel fields
. High plot scale 9 Screen type
. Horn enabled/disabled
. Low limit
. High limit
PCW Plot Conflguratlon fields

. Plot name
l Channel name
. Plot type
3-5 DATA FILES

Data files are created from master files. They are the modified versions of master files, whbh are
saved to floppy under a user-specified file name. Data files differ from master files in that they
contain configuration information for user-selected channels only. Master files, on the other hand,
contain configuration information for all assigned channels. Figure 3-l shows the relation
between master files and data files.
Like master files, data files can be used as templates from which to create new configurations.
For example, a data file named RIG A.CHNcan be loaded from floppy, modified to describe the
channel configuration of Rig B and then saved to floppy as RIG B.CH/V.
As with master files, there are two types of data files: system data files and device data files.
3-5-l Systein Data Files

System data files contain the same type of information that system master files contain and are
named in the same manner. Figure 3-1 shows the relation between system master files and
system data files.
3-5-2 Devke Data Fllea

Device data files contain the same type of information as device master files. However, data files
only contain user-selected configurations and are unique for each device (i.e. one data file for
TIM #IO,one data file for TIM #l , etc.), whereas master files contain default configurations and are
unique for each device type (i.e. one master file for all TlMs, one for all VXCs, etc.)
If devices are added to the system, all data files for the added devices are assigned the same file
name, with successive numerical extensions. For example, if two PCWs are added and
configured and the data files are saved to floppy under the name “NEWCONFG”, then the PCW
data files are NEWCOWG.030, /VEWCOfVFG.O31 and NEWCONFG.032 (see Figure 3-l).
Page M August 7,1992

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6040 DESCRIPTION
Figure 3-1. Master Files, Data Files & Configuration Modules

M/D TOTCO
3-6 DAQ SOF-WARE DEFAULT CHANNELS

The DAQ software has a set of default channels that are used during start-up to check digital and
analog inputs (Paragraph 4-8-3). These channels are listed in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3. DAQ Default ChanneWLoglcal Channel Numbers
TIME (091) I DIGITAL #lO (169) VOL. o-5 #l 0 (183)
DATE (092) DIGITAL #l 1 (170) VOL. O-5 #l 1 (184)
DAQ VERSION (111) DIGITAL #12 (171) VOL. O-5 #12 (185)
UNIT 0 VERS. (112) DlGlTALH3 (172) VOL. o-5 ##13(186)
DIGIT BOUNCE (129) 1 DlGlTAL#O4 (173) 1 VOL. O-5 #14 (187)

DIGITAL #Ol (160) I VOL. o-5 #Ol (174) I VOL. o-5 #15 (188)
DIGITAL #02 (161) I VOL. o-5 #02 (175) I VOL. O-5 #16 (189)
DIGITAL #IO3(162) VOL. O-5 #03 (176) VOL. o-5 #17 (190)
DIGITAL #04 (163) VOL. o-5 #04 (177) VOL. O-5 #18 (191)
DIGITAL #05 (164) VOL. O-5 #05 (178) VOL. o-5 #19 (192)
DIGITAL #06 (165) VOL. O-5 #IO6(179) VOL. o-5 #20 (193)
DIGITAL #07 (166) VOL. O-5 #07 (180) VOL. o-5 #21 (194)
DIGITAL #08 (167) I VOL. O-5 #Kf8 (181) VOL. o-5 #22 (195)
DIGITAL #I9 (168) VOL. O-5 #09 (182) I VOL. o-5 #I23 (196)
3-7 PROGRAM SUMMARY

The Configuration and Calibration Software has five main functions, which are summarized
below. These functions may be selected in any order.
0 CONFIGURATION - used to describe and modii the system configuration and

device configurations
[7 CALlBRATlON - used to calibrate the sensor channel for each sensor in the
system and for EDMS, if E-DEPTH is part of the TOTAL system
q DIAGNOSTICS - used to view system information; namely:

- device software versions
- sensor input values in raw counts or engineering units, arranged by
connector number
- channel values in engineering units, arranged by logical channel number
- analog and digital connector assignments
0 DAQ ACCESS - used to send all current configuration and calibration information
to the System DAQ or retrieve all configuration and calibration information from
the System DAQ
q FLOPPY/DISK - used to save configuration and calibration files to fbpy or to

the hard drive and to retrieve configuration and calibration files from f ppy or
from the hard drive

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 604 DESCRIPTION
3-6 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR CONFIGURING 81 CALlBRATlNG A NEW SYSTEM
The steps below and in Figure 3-2 outline a general procedure for configuring and calibrating a
new, single-DAQ system. For specifics, refer to the chapters referenced.
I I
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the system contains a TIM and that the
MASTER.T7Ufile was renamed to MASTER.010 before the Configuration
and Calibration software was initialized. I
1. Record DAQ connector assignments for each sensor and/or

instrument driven by the DAQ on a DAQ Channel Worksheet, like
the one in Appendix A.
2. Initialize the Configuration and Calibration software and load the

pertinent master files or data files from floppy (Chapter 4).
3. Configure the DAQ by selecting SYSTEM/DAQ from the TOOLS:

[CONFIGURATION] menu list (Figure 7-2) and performing Steps a
through f below, as needed.
a. Create a System channel list by adding and deleting the
necessary channels from the default channel list. Refer to
Table B-2 to ensure that all required channels are configured.
b. Edit each system channel configuration, as needed.
C. Edit the Rig Activity String, if needed.

d. Consult Field Engineering to add, delete or edit algorithms, if
needed.
8. Edit ten point tables, if needed.
f. Exit SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION and send the new

configuration to the DAQ, when prompted.
4. Configure the TIM(s) by selecting T-POT INTERFACE MODULE
from the TOOLS: [CONFIGURATION] menu list (Figure 7-2), adding
a TIM to the configuration, if necessary, and performing Steps a
through e below.
a. Create a TIM channel list of all channels assigned to the TIM
by adding and deleting the necessary channels from the
default channel list.
b. Edit the configuration for TIM channels, as needed.
c. Add, delete, create and/or edit plots/prints that will be
generated using the TIM.
d. If the system contains one TIM, proceed to Step 8.
If the system contains two TIM& repeat Steps a through c to

configure the second TIM, then proceed to Step e.
e. Exit T-POT INTERFACE MODULE CONFIGURATION and

save the new configuration to the DAQ, when prompted.
March 31.1993 PaOe3-9

M/D TOTkO
I
Inltlaltze Software 81Check Sensor Inputs
(Chapter 4)
I
Load Master file from Floppy or Hard Drhw
(Chapter 5)
I
Configure the System DA0
I (Chapter 7)
I Conflgun TIM Channek and Prints/ Plots

(Chapter 8) I
Configure VXC Channels, Screonr

& Dwloe Recorders
(Chapter 9)
I
C8llbmte Sen8or Channek

(Chapter 12)
I
Run Dlagnostks
(Chapter 8)
Figure 3-2. Initial Configuration and Calibration Procedure
Page 3-10 March 31,1H3

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6&40 DESCRIPTION
5. Configure the Visulogger XC Graphics Display(s) by selecting

VISULOGGER XC GRAPHICS DISPLAY from the TOOLS:
[CONFIGURATION] menu list (Figure 7-2), adding a VXC to the
configuration, if necessary, and performing Steps a through g below.
a. Select the Operation Level and Primary Channel for the VXC.
b. Create a VXC channel list of all channels that will be displayed

on the VXC by adding and deleting the necessary channels
from the default channel list.
c. Edit VXC channel configurations, as needed, for each channel.

d. Add, delete, create and/or edit device recorders for VXC
channels.
e. Add, delete, create and/or edit VXC display screens.
f. If the system contains one VXC, proceed to Step g.
If the system contains two VXCs, repeat Steps a through e,
then proceed to Step g.
g. Exit VISULOGGER XC GRAPHICS DISPLAY

CONFIGURATION and save the new configuration to the DAQ,
when prompted.
6. Configure the PC Workstation(s) by selecting PC WORKSTATION
from the TOOLS: [CONFIGURATION] menu list (Figure 7-2), adding
PCWs to the configuration, if needed, and performing Steps a
through f below.
a. Create a PCW channel list by adding and deleting the

necessary channels from the default channel list.
b. Edit PCW channel configurations, as needed, for each channel.
c. Add, delete, create and/or edit PCW display screens.

d. Add, delete, create and/or edit PCW plot displays.
e. If the system contains one PCW, proceed to Step 1.
If the system contains more than one PCW, repeat Steps a

through d to configure each PCW.
1. Exit PC WORKSTATION CONFIGURATION and save the new
configuration to the DAQ, when prompted.
7. Configure the DSl(s) by selecting SPECTRUM INTERFACE

MODULE from the TOOLS: [CONFIGURATION] menu list (Figure
7-2), adding DSls to the configuration, if needed, and performing
Steps a through f below.
a. Create a DSI channel list by adding the necessary channels.
b. Edit individual DSI channel configurations, as needed.

c. Configure device functions.
March31,1993 Page 3-l 1

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 3 CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATlON
DESCRIPTION MANUAL 60-40
d. Exit SPECTRUM INTERFACE MODULE CONFIGURATION

and save the new configuration to the DAQ, when prompted.
8. Calibrate each sensor channel (Chapter 12).
9. Check to see that the system is receiving the proper sensor data by
entering Diagnostics and viewing sensor inputs in raw values and/or
engineering units.
10. Save the new configuration to floppy by selecting FLOPPY: [SAVE

ALL] from the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu and
entering the file name under which the data files will be saved
(Chapter 5).
Page 3-l 2 March 31,1993

MID TOTCO
CHAPTER FOUR
START-UP
4-l INTRODUCTlON
This chapter contains the following general information on using the Configuration and Calibration
software:
. Configuration and Calibration hardware defaults and command modifiers
. the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen
. the Diagnostics F-key menu
. how to select items from screens and how to exit screens
. how to select items from lists
This chapter also contains the recommended start-up procedure for configuring a new system,
which includes:
. setting up and initializing the software using a laptop connected to a DAQ
l setting up and initializing the software without a DAQ (daqless)
. checking sensor inputs
. loading configuration modules and master files or data files
4-2 HARDWARE DEFAULTS AND COMMAND MODIFIERS
Configuration and Calibration software defaults that describe the laptop (or desktop) computer
and its comrmnication with the DAQ are used unless otherwise specified. The defaults are
summarized below:
. the laptop (or desktop) monitor will operate in black and white mode.
l the laptop (or desktop) is connected to the DAQ through COM port 1.
l the DAQ baud rate is 19200.
l thereisnoparity.
.
there is one stop bit.
. lntemrpt 60 is used to pass data between the Calconf module and VXC module.
l the software is run from drive A:
To override one or more defaults, append the appropriate command modifier(s) to the CALCONF
command, as described in Step 5, Paragraph 4-9-l. A command modiiier is a letter and/or
number appended to a command to modii its meaning.
The Default/Command Modifier screen (Figure 4-1) lists all command modifiers. To view this
screen, type CALCONF ? and then press ENTER. The screen is displayed, with hardware
defautts preceded by asterisks. Press < ENTER > or c ESC > to return to the root directory.
Auguet 7,1992 Page 4-l

M/D TOTCO
STA’RT-UP MANUAL 6W0
Command
Modifiers -
Denotes
Default
Figure 4-l. Default/Command Modifier Screen
If an unknown modifier is appended to the CALCONF command, the message shown below is
displayed. Press ENTER or the c ESC > key to continue. The Default/Command Modifier scrwn
is displayed.
> OPTIONS <

-
I

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Chapter4
MANUAL 60-40 START-UP
4-3 THE CONFlGURATlON AND CALIBRATION MAIN MENU
As shown in Figure 4-2, from the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu you can:
. configure the TOTAL system
. calibrate sensors
. view diagnostic system information - note that this information may be viewed at any
time by pressing the F-key assigned to the diagnostic function (see Paragraph 4-4)
. send configuration/calibration files to the DAQ and load them from the DAQ
. save configuration and/or calibration files to floppy or to the hard drive and retrieve
them from floppy or from the hard drive
To select an option, use the arrow keys or MOUSE to highlight the option. When highlighted, a
message that explains the option and how to select it is displayed. For example, in Figure 4-2,
“ is highlighted, and the explanation is “ enter to quit calibration/configuration
software
[CONFIGURATION] [CALIBRATION] [DIAGNOSTICS]
ESS: [SEND ALL] [LOAD ALL]
[SAVE ALL]: [LOAD ALL]: [SAVE CAL]: [LOAD CAL]
mm
Press enter to quit calibration/configuration software
Figure 4-2. Configuration and Calibration Main Menu Screen
August 7,1992 PcrgeM

M/D TOTCO
START-UP MANUAL 6&40
4-4 THE DIAGNOSTICS F-KEY MENU

At the bottom of each screen, six DIAGNOSTICS functions are listed (Figure 4-2). Each function
is preceded by a number that represents the F-key assigned to it. These functions are
summarized in Table 6-l and described in detail in Chapter 6.
To view DIAGNOSTICS data, press the appropriate F-key. The corresponding DIAGNOSTICS
screen is displayed (Chapter 6). To exit the DIAGNOSTICS screen and return to the previous
screen, press the < Esc > key or MOUSE button.
4-5 HOW TO SELECT ITEMS FROM SCREENS

To select an item from a screen, use the arrow keys to highlight the desired item and then press
ENTER or place the MOUSE pointer arrow on the desired item and then click the MOUSE button.
4-6 HOW TO EXIT A SCREEN

There are three ways to exit a screen and return to the previously displayed screen:
l Use the arrow keys to highlight the QUIT option and then press ENTER.
. Press the < ESC > key.
. Locate the MOUSE pointer anrlw outside the screen and click the MOUSE button.
4-7 HOW TO SELECT ITEMS FROM SUBMENUS

Typically when an option is selected from a screen, a submenu of available items is displayed, as
shown in Figure 5-1. To advance through the list one item at a time, use the arrow keys or
MOUSE. To scroll through a long list, use the PAGE DOWN key to advance to the last item on
each page of the list and the PAGE UP key to return to the first item on each page. Use the END
key to advance to the last item on the list and the HOME key to return to the first item on the list.
To select an item from a submenu, follow the steps below:

1. Seiect the item by either:
a. Using the UP and DOWN arrow keys, PAGE UP, PAGE
DOWN, HOME and END keys, as needed, to scroll through the
menu and highliiM the desired item, then press ENTER.
b. Typing in the minimum number of letters that uniquely identify

the item. For example, to highlight RIG B on the screen in
Figure 5-1, type B. The item is highlighted and the letter(s)
entered to identify the item blink, then press ENTER.
c. Placing the MOUSE pointer arrow on the desired item and then
clicking the MOUSE button.
2. If more than one item may be selected at once from this list, then
the kern selected is removed from the list and the list remains
displayed. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to select additional ttems.
3. When all selections have been made, exit the list by pressing the
< ESC > key or by locating the MOUSE pointer arrow outside the
submenu box and clicking the MOUSE button.

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION chapter4
MANUAL 6040 START-UP
4-8 RECOMMENDED START-UP PROCEDURE
The remainder of this chapter contains the recommended, three-step start-up procedure for
configuring a new system.
The Configuration and Calibration software is typically run from a laptop computer connected to a
DAQ, as shown in Figure 4-3. However, systems can also be configured without a DAQ
(daqless), using a laptop or desktop computer. Paragraph 4-6-l describes how to set up and
initialize the software when the computer is connected to a DAQ and Paragraph 4-8-2 describes
a daqless setup and initialization procedure.
4-8-l Step 1: Laptop setup and Inltlallzatlon Procedure
Follow the steps below to wnnect the laptop computer to the DAQ and initialize the Configuration
and Calibration software.
1. Connect the calibration cable assembly (Part Number 219812 ) to
the laptop computer g-pin serial port and to the DAQ connector
labeled “CAL.CONFIG.“, as shown in Figure 4-3.
2. Turn the laptop computer ON. The current date and time are
displayed, folbwed by the C> prompt.
3. Insert the Configuration and Calibration software disk into the A:

drive.
4. Change from the C: drive to the A: drive by typing A: and then
pressing ENTER. The A> prompt is displayed.
Figure 4-3. Connecting Laptop Computer to DAQ
AlJgu!st7,1992 -wH
M/D TOTCO
START-UP MANUAL W-49
5. To initialize the software using the hardware defaults (Paragraph

4-2) type CALCONF (in upper or lower case letters) and press
ENTER.
To initialize the software and override hardware defaults, type
CALCONF and append the appropriate command modifier(s) from
the list shown in Figure 4-l ; then press ENTER.
NOTE
A blank space must be placed between CALCONF and each
command modifier. For example, to initialize the software to
run in color, connected to the DAQ through ComP, type:
CALCONF C 2
6. The floppy disk is accessed (Figure 4-4) CALCOMEXE is loaded

from floppy, the floppy disk is checked for configuration modules
(i.e., -SYSTEM.EXE, -DAC?.EXE, etc.) and the Configuration and
Calibration Main Menu screen is displayed (Figure 4-2).
7. Proceed to Step 2 (Paragraph 4-6-3).
Figure 4-4. Software Initialization Screen

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION c-4
MANUAL 6040 START-UP
4-8-2 Alternate Step 1: Daqless Setup and lnttlallzatlon Procedure
Follow the steps below to initialize the Configuration and Calibration software without a DAQ,
using a laptop or desktop computer.
1. At the laptop, with the computer ON, insert the Configuration and
Calibration software disk into the A: drive; then change to drive A:
by typing a: and then pressing ENTER. The A> prompt is displayed.
At the desktop, with the computer ON, insert the Configuration and
Calibration disk into the appropriate drive and use the COPY
command to copy the contents of the floppy disk onto the C: drive.
When copying is complete, the C> prompt is displayed.
2. At the laptop, to initialize the software using the hardware defaults
shown in Figure 4-1, type CALCONF D (in upper or lower case
letters) and press ENTER. The floppy disk is accessed (Figure
4-4), CALCOMEXE is loaded from floppy, the floppy disk is
checked for configuration modules (i.e., -SYSTEM.EXE,
-DAC?.EXE, etc.) and the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu
screen is displayed (Figure 4-2).
At the desktop, to initialize the software using the hardware defaults
shown in Figure 4-1, type CALCONF D C: (in upper or lower case
letters) and press ENTER. The hard disk is accessed,
CALCONEEXE is loaded into memory, the hard disk is checked for
configuration modules (i.e., -SYSTEM.EXE) and the Configuration
and Calibration Main Menu screen is displayed (Figure 4-2)
3. Proceed to Step 3 (Paragraph 48-4).
4-8-3 Step 2: Sensor Input Cbck
The DAQ software defaults enable you to check sensor inputs using the DIAGNOSTICS
“INPUTS (RAW VALUES)” function. Follow the steps hebw to check sensor inputs:
1. After initializing the software (Step 6, Paragraph 4-6-l), press the

FP-key. Pertinent data is downbaded from the DAQ and the,
messages shown bebw are displayed, followed by the
DIAGNOSTICS “INPUTS (RAW VALUES)” screen (Figure 63).
> NOTICE <

REQUESTlNG CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
then

M/D TOTCO
START-UP MANUAL 60-4g
2. Simulate digital inputs for each channel by either:

a. attaching a sensor or pulse simulator to the channel’s Digital In
terminal on the DAQ Field Termination board, or
b. shorting the input by connecting a wire from the channel’s

Digital In terminal to its Ground terminal on the DAQ Field
Termination board.
3. Observe the laptop display screen. Each time the sensor or

simulator is activated or the input is shorted, either one count or the
rate should be displayed for that connector.
4. Simulate analog input for each current loop (4 - 20 mA) channel by
setting the channel’s red rocker switch on the DAQ analog board to
the “Current” position and attaching a sensor or voltage simulator to
the proper connector. A reading of 75,000 - 400,000 should be
displayed on the laptop.
5. Simulate analog input for each voltage channel by setting the

channel’s red rocker switch on the DAQ analog board to
“VOLTAGE”. Then short the input by connecting a wire from the
channel’s Source terminal to its Signal terminal. A reading of 0 -
10000 should be displayed on the laptop.
6. When all sensor inputs are checked, press the < Esc > key. The
Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen is displayed.
7. Proceed to Step 3 (Paragraph 4-6-4).
4-6-4 Step 3: Load Files

To configure a new system or overwrite the configuration stored in the DAQ, configuration
modules and master files or data files must be loaded. Use the [LOAD ALL] option and follow the
procedure in Paragraph 5-3 to load the necessary files from floppy* from the hard drive. When
the necessary files have been loaded, proceed to Chapter 7 to configure the system/DAQ.

M/D TOTCO
CHAPTER FIVE
FLOPPY/DISK
5-l INTRODUCTlON
An option called FLOPPY is available when the Configuration and Calibration software is run from
a laptop or from the A: or B: drive of a desktop PC. It used to bad configuration modules and
master files or data files from a floppy disk and to save them to floppy. An option called DISK
replaces FLOPPY when the software is run from the hard drive of a desktop PC (Paragraph
4-8-2). It is used to load configuration modules and master files or data files from the hard drive
and to save them to the hard drive. This chapter describes the FLOPPY/DISK option.
5-2 FLOPPY/DISK OPTIONS

The six FLOPPY/DISK options are summarized in Table 5-l and Paragraphs 5-3 through 5-8.
Table 5-l. FLOPPY/DISK Opti
Optlon Locatlon Descrlptlon When to Use
LOAD ALL ConfigICal Main Menu Reads into memory all Initial configuration of a new
(Paragraph 5-3) screen configuration modules, system or when overwriting
system master files (or data the current configuration.
files) and device master files
whose extensions begin with
*0.*
LOAD CAL &Wig/Cal Main Menu Reads a calibration master Calibrating sensor channels
(Paragraph 5-4) screen file or data file into memory. only.
LOAD SysterNDAQ Reads the master file or data During initial configuration,
(Paragraph 5-5) Configuration screen file for the selected system typically for the purpose of
or Main Menu screen configuration or device duplicating or modifying an
for each Device configuration into memory. existing configuration, rather
than modifying the default
configuration.
SAVE ALL Config/Cal Main Menu Saves all data for the current After initial configuration, for
(Paragraph 5-6) screen wnfiiratbn to floppy or to the purpose of saving all
the hard drive under a configurations.
user-specified file name.
SAVE CAL ConfigICal Main Menu Saves calibration data for Saving only calibration data
(Paragraph 5-7) screen selected channels to floppy files.
or to the hard drive under a
user-spectfied file name.
SAVE Main Menu screen for Saves selected system During initial configuration,
(Paragraph 5-8) each Device configurations or device typically to make the
configurations to floppy or to configuration available to the
the hard drive under [LOAD] option for the
user-specified file names. purpose described above.

WDTOTCO
FLOPPY/DISK MANUAL 6040
5-3 LOAD ALL

This option is available from the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen. Use it during
initial configuration of a new system or when overwriting the configuration stored in the DAQ. The
[LOAD ALL] option automatically loads the following:
. all configuration modules and
. all system master files with the same file name and all device master files with the
same file name and whose extensions begin with “0” or
. all data files with the same file name
To LOAD ALL from floppy or from the hard drive, follow the steps below:
1. Select FLOPPY: [LOAD ALL] or DISK: [LOAD ALL], as the case

may be, from the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen
(Figure 4-2). A submenu of available configurations is displayed, as
shown in Figure 5-l.
:;:
;:i
:::II FI OPPV- lSAVE
L-- . - - -ALLl:
---a-
Pmcc enter tn
Figure 5-l. FLOPPY: [LOAD ALL] Menu Screen
2. To bad data files and configuration modules from another rig (RIG A
or RIG B in Figure 5-l), make the appropriate selection.
Downloading begins and a series of messages like those shown in
Step 3a are displayed. When downbading is complete, the
Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen is redisplayed.
To load master files and configuration modules, select MASTER.
The following message is displayed:
Page 52 August I,1992

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION chapter 5
MANUAL 6W0 FLOPPY/DISK
RETRIEVING ALL SYSTEM PARAMETERS

FROM FLOPPY (DISK)
> NOTICE <

THE MASTER FILE MUST BE SENT TO THE DAQ
OR OVERLAID BY THE CURRENT DAQ CONFIGURATION
> OPTIONS <

OVERLAY SEND TO DAQ
3. Perform Step 3a or Step 3b, as needed.

a. To configure a new system or to overwrite the system configuration
stored in the DAQ, select SEND TO DAQ. As shown below, a
series of messages is displayed as, one by one, each master file
and configuration module is loaded and sent to the DAQ.

FROM FLOPPY (DISK)
r L:IE ~~~~h~r~) dwyi
then
then
RETRIEVING CHANNEL CONFlGUFtATlON

FROM FLOPPY (DISK)
August 7,1992 P-5-3

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 5 CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRAllON
FLOPPY/DISK MANUAL.W4
II ’NOTICE
<1
SENDING CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
.
.
.
RETRIEVING PC WORKSTATION #0
FROM FLOPPY (DISK)
// ‘NoTcEe
ll
SENDING SCREEN CONFIGURATION
b. To modify the system configuration stored in the DAQ, select

OVERLAY. With OVERLAY, master files are read into memory.
The overlay process does not occur during loading. It occurs

when each device configuration is selected for editing (i.e.,
channel configuration, screen configuration, etc.) from the
device Configuration Menu screen. At that time, the master file
loaded in Step 3b is overlaid by the corresponding
configuration stored in the DAQ.
As shown below, a series of messages is displayed as, one by one,

each master file and configuration module is loaded.
RETRIEVING CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

FROM FLOPPY (DISK)
> DRIVE ACCESS <
Accessing floppy (hard) disk _
.
.
.
RETRIEVING PC WORKSTATION #O
FROM FLOPPY (DISK)
> DRIVE ACCESS <
Accessing f bppy (hard) disk _
When downloading is complete, the Configuration and Calibration

Main Menu is displayed.

WDTOTCO
MANUAL SCt+ FLOPPY/DISK
54 LOAD CAL
This option is available from the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen. It is used
when only calibrating sensor channels.
To load calibration information from floppy, follow the steps below:

1. Select FLOPPY: [LOAD CAL] or DISK: [LOAD CAL] from the
Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen (Figure 4-2). A
submenu of available calibration files is displayed (Figure 5-2).
CESS: [SEND ALL] [LOAD ALL]
[SAVE ALL]: [SAVE CAL]: [LOA
Figure 5-2. FLOPPY: [LOAD CAL] Menu Screen
2. To load a calibration file from another rig (rig a or rig b in Figure

5-2), make the appropriate selection. The calibration file is
automatically loaded, the following messages are displayed and
then the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen is
redisplayed:
> DRIVE ACCESS <
> NOTICE c
SENDING CALIBRATION DATA
August 7,1962 Page $5

M/D TOTCO
FLOPPY/DISK MANUAL 6wo
To load the calibration master file, select “master”. The following

message is displayed:
> DRIVE ACCESS <

then
> NOTICE <

THE MASTER FILE MUST BE SENTTO THE DAQ
> OPTIONS <

OVERLAY SEND TO DAQ
3. Perform either Step a or Step b, as needed.
a. To overwrite the calibration information stored in the DAQ, select

SEND TO DAQ. The calibration information stored in the DAQ is
overwritten with that loaded from floppy (or hard disk) and the
following message is displayed:
> NOTICE <

b. To modify the calibration information stored in the DAQ, select

OVERLAY. The calibration master file is read into memory and the
Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen is displayed.
NOTE
when each device configuration is selected for ediiing (i.e.,
loaded in Step 3b is overlaid by the corresponding

MID TOTCO
MANUAL 50-40 FLOPPY/DISK
5-5 LOAD
From the SYSTEM/DAQ Configuration Menu screen (Figure 5-3), the [LOAD] option enables you
to bad one or more system configuration. From a Device Configuration Menu screen (for
example, Figure 5-4) [LOAD] enables you to bad a device configuration.
This option is typically used from a Device Configuration Menu when the system contains more
than one device of the same type and those devices will have the same, or similar configurations.
For example, if VXC #l will have a configuration similar to VXC #0, bad the device configuration
for VXC #O; then modify it as needed to describe VXC #l .
5-51 Load System Conflguratlon
When [LOAD] is selected from the SYSTEMIDAQ Configuration Menu, it is used to bad
user-selected system configurations from floppy or from the hard drive. For example, if the
channel configuration for a new system (System A) is similar to or the same as that for another
system (System B), use this option to bad system B’s channel configuration into System A; then
modify it, as needed.
To load a system configuration, follow the steps below.
1. Select FLOPPY: [LOAD] or DISK: [LOAD] from the SYSTEM/DAQ
Configuration Menu (Figure 7-3). When [LOAD] is selected, a
submenu of configuration types is displayed (Figure 5-3).
CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT: [ADD] [EDlTl [ADD+EDITl [DELETE] [CLEAR]
1 RIG ACTIVITY STRINGS: VW

1 ALGORITHMS: [EDIT] [ADD+EDIT] [DELETE]
1 TEN POINT TABLES: IEDIT]

.,.
.:.:
.::::
F
..,.
:;
;:;
:.
:::../
;:I:
.::.i
.:.
:.:
:.: Press enter to bad system
;.:.
..(
,;.:
;i:
,j:::,:
::::
,::.:
::::
_ Figure 5-3. SYSTEMDAQ Configuration Screen - [LOAD] Submenu
August I,1992 Pago*7

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 5 CONflGURATlON AND CALlBRATlON
FLOPPY/DISK MANUAL 50-40
2. To load one of the configurations listed, highlight the configuration

and press ENTER. To load all four configurations listed, select ALL
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS. Depending upon the configuration
selected, a message similar to the one below is displayed (where
XXX represents the configuration(s) being loaded), followed by a list
of available configuration file names:
RETRIEVING XXX
FROM FLOPPY( DISK)
then
> OPTIONS <

SELECT CANCEL _
3. To load system data files from another rig (rig a or rig b above),
make the appropriate selection. Downloading begins and a series
of messages like those shown in Step 4a are displayed. When
downloading is complete, the SYSTEMIDAQ Configuration screen
is displayed.
To load sytism master files, select “ The following
> NOTICE <

ME MASTER FILE MUST BE SENT TO THE DAQ
OR OVERLAID BY ME CURRENT DAQ CONFIGURATION
> OPTIONS<
OVERLAY SEND TO DAQ
4. Perform Step 4a or 4b, as needed.

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 60-40 FLOPPY/DISK
a. To overwrite the configuration stored in the DAQ with the one

selected in Step 3, select SEND TO DAQ. Depending upon the
selection made in Step 3, a series of messages like the ones shown
below may be displayed, as the selected master file(s) are
downloaded and sent to the DAQ:
RETRIEVING XXX
FROM FLOPPY (DISK)
> DRIVE ACCESS <
> NOTICE c
SENDING XXX DATA
b. To modify the configuration stored in the DAQ, select OVERLAY

The master file (s) are loaded into memory.
NOTE
I
baded in Step 3b is overlaid by the corresponding
Depending upon the selection made in Step 2, a series of

messages like the one shown hebw may he displayed, as the
selected master file(s) are downloaded.
RETRIEVING XXXCONFIGURATION
FROM FLOPPY (DISK)
> DRIVE ACCESS <
L
5. When downloading is complete, the SYSTEWDAQ Configuration

screen is displayed, with the (LOAD] submenu displayed (Figure
5-3). To load another configuration, repeat Steps 2 through 4.
To exit [LOAD], press the < Esca key. The SystemIDAQ
Configuration screen is displayed.
August 7,1992 PaOeH

M/D TOTCO
5-5-2 Load Device Conflguratlon

When [LOAD] is selected from a Device Configuration Menu, it is used to bad user-selected
device configurations from floppy or from the hard drive. For example, if the configuration for
VXC ##Ois similar to or the same as that for VXC #1 , use this option from the VXC #l Device
Configuration screen to load the configuration file for VXC #IQ;then modify it as needed to
describe VXC #l . To load a device configuration, follow the steps below:
NOTE
Only device configurations whose extensions begin with “0” can be loaded,
for example, RIG6.070.
1. Select FLOPPY: [LOAD] or DISK: [LOAD] from the appropriate

device Configuration Menu screen. When [LOAD] is selected, a
submenu of device files is displayed (Figure 5-4).
Operation Level: Graphics

Primary Channel: DEPTH
DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] [EDII] [ADD+EDIT] [DELETE]
DEVICE SCREENS: [ADD] [EDITI [DELETE]
DEVICE RECORDERS: [ADD] [EDITJ [DELETE]
FLOPPY: [SAVE] m
WJITJ I
Press enter to bad a device con
Fiire 5-4. VXC Device Configuration Screen - [LOAD] Submenu
2. To load a device data file (RIG A ##O,RIGA #l or RIGB #O in Figure

5-4), make the appropriate selection. Downloading begins and a
series of messages like those shown in Step 3a are displayed.
When downloading is complete, the device Configuration screen is
redisplayed.
To load the device master file, select MASTER #O. The following
Page 510 Augu8t 7,1992

MID TOTCO
MANUAL 604 FLOPPY/DISK
> DRIVE ACCESS <

> NOTICE <

> OPTIONS <

OVERLAY SEND TO DAQ
3. To load the master file, perform Step 3a or 3b, as needed.
a. To overwrite the device configuration stored in the DAQ with the one
selected in Step 2, select SEND TO DAQ. Depending upon the
device and upon the selection made in Step 2, a series of
messages like the ones shown below may be displayed, as the
device master file is downloaded and sent to the DAQ.
> NOTICE <
SENDING T-POT CONFIGURATION
> NOTICE <
SENDING DEVICE CONFIGURATION
> NOTICE c
SENDING SCREEN CONFIGURATION
th8n
SENDING ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION
August 7,1992 Page641

MiD TOTCO
FLOPPY/DISK MANUAL W-40
When downloading is complete, the device Configuration Menu

screen is displayed.
NOTE
The messages in Step3a are displayed more than once if there
is more than one of that type of configuration in the device file.
For example, if the VXC device file contains three screen
configurations, then “SENDING SCREEN CONFIGURATION”
is displayed three times.
b. To modify the device configuration stored in the DAQ, select

OVERLAY. The device master file is read into memory.
NOTE
loaded in Step 3b is overfaid by the corresponding
4. When downloading is complete, the Device Configuration screen

(Figure 5-4) is displayed.

M/D TOTCO
CONFlGURATlON AND CALIBRATION Chapter6
5-6 SAVE ALL

This option is available from the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen. Use it to save
all system data files and device data files to floppy or to the hard drive under a user-specified file
name.
To save all configurations, follow the steps below:
1. Select FLOPPY: [SAVE ALL] or DISK: [SAVE ALL] from the

Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen (Figure 4-2). The
> MENU <

Enter filename: _
2. Type in the name (maximum of eight characters) to assign to the

data files and press ENTER.
3a. If all configuration changes have been sent to the DAQ, then the
DAQ contains the same configuration information as the
Configuration and Calibration software and the data files are
automatically saved. A series of messages is displayed as, one by
one, system data files and device data files are saved:
SAVING ALL SYSTEM PARAMETERS

TO FLOPPY (DISK)
> DRIVE ACCESS <
SAVING CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

TO FLOPPY (DISK)
> DRIVE ACCESS c
SAVING PC WORKSTATION #IO

TO FLOPPY (DISK)
> DRIVE ACCESS c
August 7,1992 Page 513

MID TOTCO
Chapter 5 CONFlGURATlON AND CALIBRATlON
3b. If all changes to a system configuration have not been sent to the
DAQ, the following message is displayed, where XXX represents
the configuration type, i.e., channel configuration. This information
will be saved under the file name entered in Step 2, with the
appropriate extension (.CHN, .SE/V, etc.).
SAVING XXXCONFIGURATION
TO FLOPPY (DISK)
> OPTIONS <

YES NO
Select YES to retrieve the configuration stored in the DAQ and

overwrite the configuration in the Configuration and Calibration
software. The following message is displayed:
I/’ NoTcEc
/I
REQUESTING XXXCONFIGURATION
Select NO to save the configuration in the Configuration and

Calibration software.
Likewise, if changes to a device configuration have not been sent to

the DAQ, a similar message is displayed. An example is shown
below for the VXC, where XXX represents the VXC configuration
type, i.e., channel configuration, screen configuration, etc. All
configuration information for each device is saved under the file
name entered in Step 2, with the designated extension for that
device; i.e., .07Ufor a TIM, .020for a VXC and .030for a PCW.
SAVING VISULOGGER XC GRAPHICS DISPLAY #O

TO FLOPPY (DISK)
> OPTIONS c
YES NO
_ 4. When all configurations have been saved, the Configuration and

Calibration Main Menu screen is displayed.

M/D TOTCO
5-7 SAVE CAL
This option is available from the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen. Use it to save
calibration data files to floppy or to the hard drive. These files are saved under user-specified file
names and contain calibration information for user-specified channels only.
To save a calibration data file, follow the steps below:
1. Select FLOPPY: [SAVE CAL] or DISK: [SAVE CAL] from the

Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen (Figure 4-2). The
> MENU <

Enter filename: _

calibration data file and press ENTER. The following messages are
displayed as the calibration data file is copied:
> DRIVE ACCESS <

3. The Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen is redisplayed.

M/D TOTCO
FLOPPY/DISK MANUAL 6W0
5-8 SAVE
The [SAVE] option is available from the SYSTEMIDAQ Configuration Menu screen (Figure 5-3)
and from Device Configuration Menu screens (for example, Figure 5-4). It enables you to save
system and/or device configurations to floppy or to the hard drive.
5-8-l Save System Conflguratkm

When selected from the SYSTEM/DAQ Configuration Menu, [SAVE] is used to save selected
system configurations to floppy or to the hard drive. For example, you might save the channel,
sensor & output configuration for System A so that it can then he loaded and used to configure
System B. To save a system configuration, follow the steps hebw.
1. Select FLOPPY: [SAVE] or DISK: [SAVE] from the SYSTEM/DAQ

Configuration Menu (Figure 5-3). A list of configuration types is
displayed (Figure 5-5).
..,.
..
.,. CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT: [ADD] [EDIT] [ADD+EDIT] [DELETE] [CLEAR]
:::
:.:j
.::: RIG ACTIVITY STRINGS: [EDIT]
:i
:::.
..:.
:.:
./,: ALGORITHMS: [EDITJ [ADD+EDITJ [DELETE]
:.:::
...:.
::
..:.
i..
:.:
..
TEN POINT TABLES: WTJ
..:
:.:.:j
.:
..:j
:..::
::j
..:
..::
:
:,;
.:
::j
,.:.:
j;:
Figure 5-5. SYSTEM/DAQ Configuration Screen - [SAVE] Submenu
2. To save one of the configurations listed, highlight the configuration

and press ENTER. To save all four wnfgurations listed, select ALL
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS. The message below is displayed:
SAVING ALL SYSTEM PARAMETERS
TO FLOPPY (DISK)
> MENU <

Enter filename: _
Page 516 August 7,1962

WDTOTCO

data file(s) that will be saved and then press ENTER.
4a. If the system data files being saved are the same as those stored in
the DAQ, a message similar to the following is displayed, where
XXX represents the configuration(s) being saved.
SAVING XXX
TO FLOPPY (DISK)
> DRIVE ACCESS c
4b. If the system data files being saved are diierent from those stored
in the DAQ, a message similar to the following is displayed, where
XXX represents the configuration(s) being saved:
SAVING XXXCONFIGURATION
TO FLOPPY (DISK)
> OPTIONS <

YES NO
Select YES to retrieve the system configuration stored in the DAQ

and overwrite that configuration in the Configuration and Calibration
software. A message similar to the following is displayed:
> NOTICE <

Select NO to save the configuration in the Configuration and

When all configurations have been saved, the SystemIDAQ
Configuration Menu screen is displayed.

M/D TOTW
FLOPPY/DISK MANUAL 60-40
8-82 Save Device Conflguratkm

When selected from a Device Configuration Menu, [SAVE] is used to save device configurations
to floppy or to the hard drive. Usually, these device configurations will then he loaded to
configure another device of the same type. For example, if the configuration for VXC #l will he
similar to that for VXC #KI, save the configuration for VXC #IOand then load it as the configuration
for VXC #l . To save a system configuratin, follow the steps below.
1. Select FLOPPY: [SAVE] or DISK: [SAVE] from the Device

Configuration Menu (for example, Figure 5-4). The following
> MENU <

Enter filename: _

device data file that will be saved and then press ENTER.
3a. If the device configuration being saved is the same as the one
stored in the DAQ, a message similar to the following is displayed,
where XXX represents the configuration(s) being saved:
SAVING XXX
TO FLOPPY (DISK)
> DRIVE ACCESS <

3b. If the device configuration differs from that stored in the DAQ, a
message similar to the following is displayed, where XXX
represents the configuration being saved:
/;i;;;i;~b&ii--j
> OPTIONS <

YES NO
Select YES to retrieve the device configuration stored in the DAQ

and overwrite the configuration in the Configuration and Calibration
software. The following message is displayed:
> NOTICE <
Select NO to save the device configuration in the Configuration and


M/D TOTCO
CHAPTER SIX
DIAGNOSTICS
6-l INTRODUCTION
DIAGNOSTICS enables you to view the following information:

. software versions for each device
. sensor input in raw counts or in engineering units, arranged by connector number
. engineering units for each configured channel, arranged by logical channel number
. analog and digital connector assignments
. DAQ communications board information in order to identify software problems
The DIAGNOSTICS functions can be accessed two ways:
. by selecting DIAGNOSTICS from the Configuration and Calibration-Main Menu
. by pressing the function’s F-key from anywhere in the program
Table 6-1 summarizes the DIAGNOSTICS functions and their F-key assignments.
6-2 THE DIAGNOSTICS F-KEY MENU
The F-key menu is displayed at the bottom of each screen. To view a DIAGNOSTICS data
screen, press the assigned F-key. To exit the DIAGNOSTICS screen and return to the previous
screen, press the < Esc > key or MOUSE button.
Table 6-l. DIAGNOSTICS F-Key Summary
F-Key Function Descrlptbn Reference
Fl VERSIONS View software version numbers for system devices. Paragraph 6-4
F2 INPUTS (RAW) View raw input values for each sensor channel, Paragraph 6-5
arranged by connector number.
F3 VALUES View values, in engineering units, for each system Paragraph 6-6
channel, arranged by logical channel number
F4 INPUTS (EU) View engineering unit values, for each sensor Paragraph 6-7
channel, arranged by connector number.
F5 D CONNECT View channels assigned to digital connectors, Paragraph 6-6

F6 A CONNECT View channels assigned to analog connectors, Paragraph 6-9

F7* View DAQ Error Counts Emulate the DAQ communications board to view Paragraph
DAQ error counts. 6-10
v Vii DEBUG Output Used upon system reset with Dip Switch 2 (SW7) Paragraph
in OFF position to view debug information. 6-11
l Not displayed on DIAGNOSTICS F-key menu or on DIAGNOSTICS Menu screen.
August 7,1992 Page61

M/D TOTCO
I

DIAGNOSTICS MANUAL 60-40
6-3 THE DlAGNOSTlCS MENU

From the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen (Figure 4-2) highlight DIAGNOSTICS
and then press ENTER. The DIAGNOSTICS menu is displayed (Figure 6-l). To select a
function, highlight the function and then press ENTER. The corresponding screen is displayed.
To exit the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, press the < Esc > key or highlight QUIT and then press ENTER.
DIAGNOSTICS SELECTIONS <
[SOFTWARE VERSIONS]
[INPUTS (RAW VALUES)] [CHANNEL VALUES] [INPUTS (ENG. UNITS)]
[DIGITAL I/O CONNECTIONS] [ANALOG CONNECTIONS]
m
Press enter to quit diagnostics and return to the main menu
Figure 6-l. DIAGNOSTICS Menu Screen
6-4 SOFIWARE VERSIONS

Use this function to view software version numbers for each device in the system. From the
DIAGNOSTICS Menu, highlight [SOFTWARE VERSIONS] and then press ENTER or press the
Fl key from any screen. If the data required for this display has not been downloaded from the
DAQ, one or more messages like the one shown below are displayed, where XXX represents the
type of configuration requested:
> NOTICE <
// ==I
A screen similar to the one in Figure 6-2 is displayed. To return to the DIAGNOSTICS Menu,
press < Esc > or the MOUSE button.
NOTE
The DCM cannot send information to the DAQ; therefore, its software
version is not displayed (Figure 6-2). Refer to Paragraph 6-4-2 for
instructions on entering the DCM software version number.

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6040 DIAGNOSTICS
Figure 6-2. SORWARE VERSIONS Screen
6-4-l The UNIT # VERS. Channel
As shown in Table 3.2, the default configuration contains a channel named UNIT 0 VERS. This
channel is automatically assigned to the VXC and instructs the DAQ to poll the VXC for its
software version number. When polled, the VXC sends its version number to the DAQ so that it
can be displayed on the SOFTWARE VERSIONS screen.
In order to display software versions of other system devices, the system channel list must
include one UNIT kcVERS channel for each device. Refer to Paragraph 7-3-4 for instructions on
adding channels to the channel list. Refer to Paragraph 6-4-2 for instructions on enabling the
DCM software version number for display.
6-4-2 View DCM Software Versbn Number
The DCM cannot send information to the DAQ; consequently, the SOFtWARE VERSIONS
screen does not automatically display the DCM version number, as shown in Figure 6-2. To
display the DCM software version, refer to Paragraph 7-3-7 and edit the UNIT # VERS Channel
Configuration screen so that the Sensor Type is “Manual Value” and the Manual Value field
contains the DCM software version number. Then the DCM version number will be displayed on
the SOFTWARE VERSIONS screen.

M/D TOTCO
DIAGNOSTICS MANUAL 60=40
6-5 INPUTS (RAW VALUES)

Use this option to view raw input counts for each sensor channel, arranged by connector number,
for the DAQ connected to the laptop.
From the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, highlight [INPUTS (RAW VALUES)] and then press ENTER or
press the F2 key from any screen. If the data required for this display has not been downloaded
from the DAQ, messages like the one shown below are displayed, where XXXrepresents the
I/ ‘NoTlCEc =il
A screen listing the sensor type, channel name and raw inputs for each analog (Jl A - J23A) and
digital (Jl D - J14D) connector is displayed (Figure 6-3). Odd-numbered connectors are
presented on the left haif of the screen and even-numbered connectors on the right.
NOTE:
If two or more channels are assigned to the same input connector, only the
channel with the largest logical channel number is displayed on this screen:
i.e. if Channel 001 and 002 are assigned to the same connector, only
Channel 002 is displayed.
To return to the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, press the c ESC > key or MOUSE button.
Figure 6-3. INPUTS (RAW VALUES) Screen

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 60-40 DIAGNOSTICS
6-6 INPUTS (ENGINEERING UNITS)
Use this option to view input data in engineering units for each sensor channel, arranged by
connector number, for the DAQ connected to the laptop.
From the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, highlight [INPUTS--ENG. UNITS] and then press ENTER or
from the DAQ, one or more messages like the one shown below are displayed, where XXX
represents the type of configuration requested:
> NOTICE <

A screen listing the sensor type, channel name and engineering units value for each analog
(JlA - J23A) and digital (JlD - J14D) connector is displayed (Figure 6-4). Odd-numbered
connectors are presented on the left and even-numbered connectors on the right.
NOTE:
If two or more channels are assigned to the same input connector, only the
channel with the largest logical channel number is displayed on this screen:
i.e. if Channel 001 and 002 are assigned to the same connector, only
Channel 002 is displayed.
To return to the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, press the < ESC > key or MOUSE button.
Figure 6-4. INPUTS (ENGINEERING UNITS) Screen

M/D TOTCO
DIAGNOSTICS MANUAL 6040
6-7 CHANNEL VALUES

Use this option to view engineering values for each configured sensor channel, arranged by
logical channel number.
From the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, highlight [CHANNEL VALUES] and then press ENTER or press
the F3 key from any screen. If the data required for this display has not been downloaded from
the DAQ, one or messages like the one shown below are displayed, where XXX represents the
> NOTICE <

A screen listing channel name, channel data value and engineering units is displayed (Figure 6-5).
NOTE:
The INPUTS (RAW VALUES) and INPUTS (ENGINEERING UNITS)
screens display only channels with connector assignments. However, the
CHANNEL VALUES screen displays all configured channels.
If all channels cannot fit on one screen, press “Page Down” to view more channels. To return to
the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, press the c ESC > key or MOUSE button.
Figure 6-5. CHANNEL VALUES Screen

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 8&40 DIAGNOSTICS
68 DIGITAL I/O CONNECTIONS
Use this option to view a list of DAQ digital connector assignments, arranged by connector
number.
NOTE:
Each digital connector can be used as either input or output, but not both.
From the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, highlight [DIGITAL l/O CONNECTIONS] and then press ENTER
or press the F5 key from any screen. If the data required for this display has not been
downloaded from the DAQ, one or messages like the one shown below are displayed, where
XXX represents the type of configuration requested:
i ’ NoTcE
<7
II REQUESTING XXXCONFIGURATION
/I
A screen listing the sensor type and channel name for each digital connector is displayed (Figure
6-6). If several channels use the same input, each channel is listed next to the connector, for
example J5 in Figure 6-6.
To return to the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, press the c ESC > key.
Figure 6-6. DIGITAL I/O CONNECTIONS Screen

M/D TOTCO
6-9 ANALOG CONNECTlONS

Use this option to view a list of DAQ analog connector assignments, arranged by connector
number.
From the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, highlight [ANALOG CONNECTIONS] and then press ENTER or
from the DAQ, one or more messages like the one shown below are displayed, where XXX
represents the type of configuration requested:
//‘NoTICEc
=il
A screen listing the sensor type and channel name for each analog connector is displayed (Figure
6-7). Connectors Jl A - J18A are listed on one screen; press the <Page Down> key to view
connectors J-19 - J-23. If several channels use the same input, each channel is listed next to the
connector.
To return to the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, press the < ESC > key.
Figure 6-7. ANALOG CONNECTIONS Screen

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 86-40 DIAGNOSTICS
6-10 DAQ ERROR COUNTS SCREEN

The “DAQ Error Counts” option enables you to emulate the DAQ communications board and view
DAQ error counts, as shown in Figure 6-8. All values displayed are measured from the time that
the DAQ was last reset. To use this option, follow the steps below:
1. From any screen, press the F7 key. A blank screen is displayed.
2. Change the setting of position 1 on Dip Switch 2 on the DAQ

Processor Board. The DAQ ERROR COUNTS screen (Figure 6-8)
is displayed. The values on this screen represent values at the time
the Dip Switch setting was changed.
3. To view an updated screen, change the setting of position 1 on Dip

Switch 2 on the DAQ Processor Board. An updated screen is
displayed, containing values representative of the time that the Dip
Switch setting was changed.
4. Repeat Step 3, as needed, to view an updated screen.
5. To exit this screen, press the F7 key.
Figure 6-8. DAQ ERROR COUNTS Screen

M/D TOTCO
DlAGNOSTlCS MANUAL 6&4g
6-l&1 DAQ ERROR COUNTS Screen Fields

The fields on the DAQ ERROR COUNTS screen are described below.
Total Hours - the number of hours that the DAQ has been running since the last time defauft
values were loaded; i.e., since the system was reset.
Hours Since P.O. - the number of hours that the DAQ has been running since the last power
outage
Power Failures - the number of times the DAQ has lost power
External Resets - the number of times the DAQ has been reset, by pressing the two RESET
buttons (see Manual 60-l 0).
Software Watchdog Resets - the number of times that the watchdog timer has had to reset the
software
Halt Monitor Resets - a DAQ internal processor error
Loss of Clock Resets - a DAQ internal processor error
System Reset - a DAQ internal processor error

Test Module Resets - a DAQ internal processor error
EEROM Write Failures - the number of times that configuration information was not successfully
written to the EEROM
EDEPTH P mr?a?pMr Timeouts - the number of times that the DAQ did not receive a response
from E-Depth
Analw Processo r Timeouts - the number of times that the DAQ did not receive a response from
the analog processor
DAQ TPOT Timeouts - the number of times that the DAQ did not receive a response from the
DAQ communications board
Dewlce Y Not Talking - the number of times that the DAQ sent data to the device and did not
receive an acknowledgment from the device
Fall Rate - located next to “Device # Not Talking”, this is the percentage of times that the device
was “not talking”.

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6040 DIAGNOSTICS
6-11 DEBUG
Use the DEBUG capability to check system operation while running the Configuration and
Calibration software as follows:
1. From any point in the Configuration and Calibration software, press
the F7 key to enter TERMINAL EMULATOR mode.
2. On the DAQ Digital Board, change the position of SW 7 on Dip

Switch 2 to OFF.
3. Reset the DAQ by turning it OFF and then turning it ON. The
following message is displayed, informing you of the functions that
will be checked during DEBUG:
The Powerup Routine is executing after RESET. The messages

which will be displayed during execution are:
- If BLOW WORLD AWAY DIP SW 2 (SW8) is detected OFF.
- If EEPROM is not valid, and defaults are loaded.

- If an error is detected writing to EEPROM.
- If ANALOG PROCESSOR is not responding to polls.
- If COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR is not responding to polls.
- TPOT inquiries (and their responses) can be displayed by

setting memory address 127088 to non zero (PM 12708 01).
DEBUG output can be suppressed by setting DIP SW2 (SW/ to ON.
4. Messages will be displayed automatically if any one of the first five

conditions described on the above screen exist.
To view TPOT inquiries and responses for all system devices (item
six on the above screen), go to Step 5. To exit DEBUG, go to Step
10.
5. Hold down the Ctrt key and press C. The following prompt is
displayed:
pROBE+ >
6. Type PM 127688 1 and then press ENTER. The pROBE + >

prompt is redisplayed.
NOTE
The memory address, PM 127088, is unique to Configuration
and Calibration software Version 3.10. Future software
versions will present their own respective addresses for you to
enter.
August 7,1992 Page 6-l 1

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 6 CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATtON
7. Type GO and press ENTER. A series of DEBUG messages similar

to that shown below is displayed, as each system device is polled
and the status reported:
. . . Polled tpot CID #!O.response = NO RESPONSE. . .
8. To stop the DEBUG messages, hold down the Ctrl key and press C;
the pROBE + > prompt is displayed.
9. Type PM 127088 0 and press ENTER: then, at the pROBE + >

prompt, type GO and press ENTER. The display is halted.
10. To exit DEBUG and return to configuration and calibration, change

the position of SW 7 on Dip Swiich 2 of the DAQ Digital Board to
ON and then press the P7 key. The Configuration and Calibration
Main Menu screen is displayed.

M/D TOTCO
CHAPTER SEVEN
INITIAL SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION
7-1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains instructions for initial SystenVDAQ configuration of a new system. It
describes how to use SystenVDAQ Configuration to create configurations for all system-level
parameters; namely:
. channel, sensor and output configuration
. rig activiiy string configuration
. algorithm configuration
. ten point table configuration
Figure 7-l outlines the general procedure for System/DAQ wnfguration of a new system. For
instructions on modifying existing configurations, refer to Chapter 15.
7-2 THE SYSTEWDAQ CONFIGURATION MENU
From the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu (Figure 4-2) highlight “CONFIGURATION”
and press ENTER. The submenu shown in Figure 7-2 is displayed. Highlight SYSTEMDAQ and
press ENTER. The SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION Menu screen is displayed (Figure 7-3).
’ From this menu, you can:
. create a System channel list by addi channels to and deleting or clearing channels
from the CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OU“9 PUT: [EDITJ submenu
. edit channel, sensor and output configurations
. edit the rig activity string
. add, delete and edit algorithms
l edit any of the four, ten point tables

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL SYSTEMIDAQ CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6090
Edit lndlvldual Channel

Addlng/Deletlng Conflgurations
Select Algorlt~flguratlon, If
(Paragraph 7-5)
I
Select Ten Point Table
Confl uratlon lfnesded
(&rag&h 7-6)
I
Exit System/DAQ Conflguratlon &
Send Configuration to DAQ
(Paragraph 7-7)
Figure 7-l. Initial System/DAQ Configuration Procedure
Page 7-2 March31,1993

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION -7
MANUAL 6&40 INITIAL SYSTEWDAQ CONFiGURATiON
TOOLS:
DAQ ACCESS:
FLOPPY:
Figure 7-2. [CONFIGURATION] Submenu
CHANNEL, SENSOR, 8 OUTPUT: [ADD] [EDIT] [ADD+EDITJ [DELETE] [CLEAR]
RIG ACTIVITY STRINGS: [EDIT]
ALGORITHMS: [ED11 [ADD+EDITJ [DELETEJ
TEN POINT TABLES: [=‘I1
FLOPPY: [SAVE] [LOAD]
Figure 7-3. SYSTEWDAQ Configuration Screen
August 7,1992 P8go 7-3

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6&4g
7-3 CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT CONFlGURATlON

Use this option to create a System channel list by adding channels to and deleting channels from
the [EDIT] submenu and then edit channel, sensor and output connector configurations.
7-3-l The System Channel List

The System channel list is the master channel list for the TOTAL system and should contain all
channels in the system. lt is displayed on the CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT [EDIT]
submenu (Figure 7-4).
NOTE
Channels that are not included on the System channel list will not be
available to any other system device (i.e. VXC, PCW, TIM or Slave DAQ).
The channel configuration master file, MASTERCHN, tags the most commonly used channels as
System channels and it is these channels that make up the defauft [EDIT] submenu. However,
these channels are provided simply as a starting point from which to begin configuration. You will
likely add channels to and delete channels from this list to create a System channel list that
represents the rig.
CHANNEL, SENSOR, 8 OUTPUT: [ADD]
RIG ACTIVITY STRINGS:
ALGORITHMS:
TEN POINT TABLES:
FLOPPY: [SAVE:
Figure 7-4. MASTER.C/fN Default System Channel List

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6&4g INITIAL SYSlEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION
7-3-2 Required System Channels
Channels required by system devices must be included on the System channel list. To ensure
that the necessary channels are included on the System channel list, consider the following:
l Channels used as TIM Print/Plot Update Events must be on the System channel list.
l The TIME and DATE channels are required for correct VXC data display.
. The PCW requires the DEPTH channel.
. All pre-assigned DSI channels (Table 11-l) that are used in the system must be on
the System channel list.
7-3-3 Logical Channel Numbers
A logical channel number is assigned to each named channel and displayed at the top of the
Channel Configuration screen; for example, the logical channel number for FLOW OUT is 055
(Figure 7-5). Unused channel numbers are part of the CHANNEL, SENSOR & OUTPUT: [ADD]
submenu (Paragraph 7-3-5). A total of 252 logical channel numbers are available.
CAUTION
The logical channel number assigned to a channel should not be changed.
This is because the algorithms use logical channel numbers, not channel
names, to locate input data for their calculations. New channels added to
the wnfiguration should be assigned unused logical channel numbers.
7-3-4 Channel Conflguratlon Worksheet
We recommend completing a Channel Configuration Worksheet (Appendix A) before beginning

CHANNEL, SENSOR AND OUTPUT CONFIGURATION to record the:
l Channel assigned to each analog connector, JlA through J23A, and whether that
channel is connected to a current (C) or vottage (V) type sensor
l Channel assigned to each digital connector, Jl D through J14D, or whether that

channel is betng used for input (IN) or output (OUT)
l Output type and high/low limits or trip value of each digital connector used as output.
7-3-5 ADD Channels

Use the CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT: [ADD] option to add channels to the System channel
list, as follows:
1. From the SYSTEM/DAQ CONFlGURATlON screen (Figure 7-3),

highlight ADD and press ENTER. A submenu of available channels
is displayed. Assigned channels have channel names (i.e. Pit
Volume 5); unassigned channels are,listed by logical channel
number (i.e. Channel # 003).
2. To add an assigned channel, highlight the channel name and then

press ENTER. To add an unassigned channel, highlight the bgiil
channel number and then press ENTER.
3. Repeat Step 2, as needed, to add channels.

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL SYSTEMIDAQ CONflGURATlON MANUAL 6MO
4. When the list contains the necessary channels, press the < Esc >
key. The submenu is closed.
7-3-6 DELETE Channels

Use the CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT [DELETE] option to remove channels from the
System channel list as follows:
1. From the SYSTEWDAQ CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 7-3)

highlight DELETE and press ENTER. The System channel list is
displayed.
2. Highlight the channel to delete and then press ENTER. The
channel is removed from the System channel list and from the
[DELETE] submenu.
3. Repeat Step 2, as needed, to delete channels.

4. After deleting the necessary channels, press the < Esc > key. The
submenu is closed.
7-3-7 CLEAR the System Channel Llst

The CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT [CLEAR] option removes all channels from the System
channel list. To use this option, highlight CLEAR and press ENTER. The following message is
displayed:
> NOTICE <
CLEAR CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT

CONFIGURATION
> OPTIONS <

NO YES
Select NO to disregard the CLEAR option. Select YES to delete all channels from the list; all
channels are immediately removed from the lii.
7-3-9 EDIT Channel, Sensor & Output Conflguratlons

Use the CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT: [EDIT] option to edit channel, sensor and output
configurations. From the SYSTEMIDAQ CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 7-3), highlight EDIT
and press ENTER. A Channel Configuration screen is displayed (Figure 7-5). Paragraph 7-3-9
describes how to edft this screen and Paragraph 7-3-l 0 summarizes each field on the screen.
Page 7-6 March 19,1993

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION chaper7
MANUAL 6&4g INlTlAL SYSTEM/DAQ CONflGURATlON
7-3-9 How to Edit a Channel Conflguratlon
Use the arrow keys or MOUSE to select Channel Configuration screen fields. When a field is
selected, it appears in reverse video an instruction line at the bottom of the screen tells how to
edit the selected field. For example, in Figure 7-5 the Algorithm field is selected and the
instruction line reads “Press < ENTER > to select”.
How a field is edited depends upon the type of field it is. The SYSTEM/DAQ Channel
Configuration screen contains two types of fields. One type requires you to type in a value using
the keyboard. When this field type is selected, a blinking cursor appears to the right of the field
value. To change the field value, type in a new value and then press ENTER; the new value is
displayed. The following fields are this type:
. Channel Name . Manual String

. Name (part 1) l Low Scale (Analog Output Type)
. Name (part 2) l High Scale (Analog Output Type)
l Units l Must Turn On Value (Discrete Output Type)
. Precision l Must Turn Off Value (Discrete Output Type)
. Filter Value l Low Limit (Alarm Output Type)
. Manual Value . High Limtt (Alarm Output Type)
Figure 7-5. SYSTEWDAQ Channel Configuration Screen
August 7,1992 Page4 7-7

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL SYSTEMIDAQ CONFIGURATION MANUAL 9&40
The second field type provides a submenu of available selections. To edit this field type, use the
arrow k8yS or MOUSE to highlight the field and then press ENTER; the submenu is displayed.
Use the arrow keys to highligM the submenu item and press ENTER. The new selection is
displayed. The following fields are of this type:
l Algorithm l Sensor type
l Sample rate l Connector
. Operator cannot zero channel l Operator cannot modify channel
. Channel is initially active l Qperator cannot activate channel
l Channel is initially algorithm inactive l Channel cannot be algorithm activated
l Output type l Output connector
To exit, press the <Esc> key; the SYSTEMIDAQ CONFIGURATION screen is displayed.
7-3-10 Channel Conflguratlon Screen Fields

The fields on the Channel Configuration Screen are summarized on the following pages.
Channel Name - the channel name (up to 12 characters, including blanks). This is the label used
when a channel is displayed. Do not use default channels to build new channels.
Name (part 1) - currently not used.

Name (part 2) - currently not used.
Units - th8 engineering UnitS (maximum of eight characters) that will b8 used for display.
Precision - the number of digits that can be displayed to the right of the decimal point . A
maximum of 7 numbers, including decimal points, can be displayed.
Algorithm - algorithm used to calculate data values, in engineering units, from raw input values.
Sample Rate - Used only if the system includes a Spectrum 1000, this fiekf contains the rate at
which the SPIT sends data from the DAQ to the Spectrum 1000 display panel. The sample
rate is relative and depends, in part, upon the number of channels monitored. lf the sample
rate is FASTEST, data is sent to the Spectrum 1000 about once every 200 ms. If the
sample rate is TWO, data is sent 200 ms slower than it is for FASTEST (i.e. every 400 ms);
if the sample rate is THREE, it is sent every 600 ms, and so on. .
Filter Value - the value, in percent, by which raw input data is smoothed before it is used in the
algorithm. Each raw data value is averaged with the previously filtered data value
according to the equation:
NV = (PV) (lOO?/ - FV%) + CV (FV%)
where:
NV = the filtered data value
PV = the filtered value of the previous data point
FV = the Filter Value, in percent
CV I the current data value I
The larger the Filter Value, the less the new data value is affected by the previous data
value; a Filter Value of 100 results in no fittering. For example, if the filtered value of the
previous data value is 1000 and the Filter Value is 8096, and the filtered value of a current
input data value of 1500 is:
1400 = (1000) (100% - 80%) + (1500) (80%)
Page 7-9 August I,1992

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6040 INlTlAL SYSTEWDAQ CONFIGURATION
Manual Value - Only available when the Sensor Type is “Manual Value” or “Manual String”, this
field can contain up to seven numbers and/or decimal points, whii represent a constant
value. For example, Manual Value is the Sensor Type for the LINES STRUNG channel and
the Manual Value field contains the number of lines strung, i.e., 10, 12, etc. For the RIG
ACTIVITY channel, the Sensor Type is Manual String and the Manual Value field contains
the number assigned to the default rig activiiy string in Rig Activii String Configuration
(Paragraph 74).
Manual Strlng - Only available if the Sensor Type is “Manual String”, this field can contain
up to nine characters, which typically describe the channel.
Sensor type - the sensor type used for the channel. Table 7-1 describes each sensor type.
Connector - the number of the connector that the channel sensor is connected to. For analog
sensors, select a number from 1 to 23; for digital sensors, select a number from 1 to 14.
Operator can/cannot modify channel - If this field reads “Operator can modify channel”, then
the operator can manually enter values for the field at the VXC using the “Modify Channel”
option. For example, you may want to enter the value for depth or for number of lines
strung. If the field reads “Operator cannot modify channel”, then the operator cannot
manually enter values for the field.
Operator can/cannot zero channel- lf this field reads “Operator can zero channel”, then the
operator can manually set the channel data value to zero at the VXC. If the field reads
“Operator cannot zero channel”, then the operator cannot zero the channel.
Operator can/cannot acthrate channel - This field tells if the channel’s “active” setting can be
changed at the VXC using the “Active Channel” option. (The channel’s “actiie” setting is
specified using the “Channel is/is not initially active field.) Table 7-2 illustrates how to use
these options.
Channel Is I is not lnltlalty acthfe - This field tells if the channel is currentty active. If the field
reads “Channel is initially active”, then algorithms may use the channel’s data values to
compute values for derived channels. lf the field reads “Channel is not initially active”, then
the channel’s data values are not used to wmpute values for derived channels.
To change the channel from active to inactive at the VXC, and vice versa , “Operator can
activate channel” must be selected. Otherwise, the channel cannot be changed from its
initial setting. Table 7-2 illustrates how to use the options.
Channel can / cannot be algorlthm activated - This field relates to the interface between
TOTAL and Spectrum 1000.
Channel Is / is not lnltlally algorithm lnacthfe - This field relates to the interface between
TOTAL and Spectrum 1000.
output Connector - This field is available for all sensor types. It is used to designate which DAQ
digiil connector (l-14) if any, the channel uses to send a driving signal to another
instrument.
Output type - This field is available only if an output connector is used. It describes the type Of
output signal sent to the instrument. Refer to Table 7-3 for a summary of each output type.

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6090
Table 7-1. Summary of Sensor Types
Sensor Type Descrlptlon
No Sensor Used for channels that do not require a sensor, such as TIME and DATE.
Derived Used if input data gathered by other channel sensors is used to compute
data values for the channel. No sensor is used directly by channels with
this sensor type. For example, the Mud Volume channel has a “Derived”
sensor because sensor data from the Pit Volume channels is used to
compute Mud Volume
Voltage (0 - 5 V) An analog sensor whose voltage is proportional to data values and ranges
between 0 and 5 volts.
Voltage (0 - 5 V DIFF) This sensor type is invalid for the current DAQ configuration.
Vottage (0 - 10 V) An analog sensor whose voltage is proportional to data values and ranges
between 0 and 10 volt.
Voltage (0 -10 V DIFF) This sensor type is invalid for the current DAQ configuration.
Current An analog sensor that uses a 24-volt supply voltage to generate a current
that is proportional to data values.
Slow Rate A digital sensor that measures slow rates, such as Rate of Penetration.
Rate A digital sensor that measures normal to fast rates, i.e. Strokes per Minute.
Event A digital sensor used to measure events, such as Depth.
SlllN A sensor that gathers and processes data and then passes the processed
data to TOTAL. For example, the Canary Gas Detector is a smart sensor.
Manual Value Used for channels that represent a constant value, such as LINES
STRUNG.
Manual String Used for the RIG ACTIVITY channel to make labels available for
designating current rig activii, such as Drilling or Tripping.
Slave DAQ Used only at the master DAQ to designate channels whose sensors are
connected to a slave DAQ.
EDMS Sensor Used when the channel is receiving data from an E-DEPTH sensor.
Page 7-10 August I,1992

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6090 INITIAL SYSTEM/DAQ CONFlGURATlON
Table 7-2. How to Use Channel Active Options
If... Then Use These Options... Explanation

Pit Volume 5 will a/ways 1. Channel is initially active and 1. “Channel is initially active”
be used to compute the 2. Operator cannot activate channel allows the channel’s data to be
total mud volume for the used to compute total mud volume.
Mud Volume channel
2. “Operator cannot activate
channel” prevents the operator from
deactivati the channel at the VXC
using the T” ctive Channel” option.
Pit Volume 5 will 1. Operator can activate channel. “Operator can activate channel”
occasionally be used to allows the operator to use the
compute total volume for VXC’s “Active Channel” option to
the Mud Volume channel. enable Pit Volume 5 when it will be
used to compute total mud volume
and to deactivate it when it will not
be used.
Pit Volume 5 will never be 1. Channel is not initially active and 1. “Channel is not initially active”
used to compute total mud 2. Operator cannot activate channel prevents the channels data from
volume for the Mud being used to compute total mud
Volume channel volume.
2. “Operator cannot activate
channel” prevents the channel from
being activated at the VXC using
the “Active Channel” option.
Table 7-3. Summary of DAQ Output Types
Output Type Descrlptbn

Analog (Chart)
Simulates an analog output. The DAQ supplies a pulse-width modulated signal that
is proportional to processed channel data values. The useable voltage range is from
0 to 10 VDC. I
Low Scale
The minimum output value, in engineering units. At this value, the output
connector voltage is 0 VDC.
High Scale
The maximum output value, in engineering units. At this value, the output
Analog
(Inverted) Simulates an analog output. The DAQ supplies a pulse-width modulated signal that
is proportional to processed channel data values. The useable voltage range is from
OtolOVDC.
Low Scale The minimum output value, in engineering units. At this value, the output
High Scale The maximum output value, in engineering units. At this value, the output
Continued

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL SYSTElWDAQ CONflGURATlON MANUAL 604
Table 7-3. Summary of DAQ Output Types (Continued)
OuWt Type Descrlptbn

Discrete
(Normally Low) A digital output in which the DAQ supplies no voltage until channel data values
reach the user-specified “Must Turn On” value. When the “Must Turn On” value is
reached, 10 VDC is supplied.
Must Turn Qft
When used with Discrete (Normally Low), the Must Turn Qtt Value is numerically
Value
smaller than the Must Turn On Value. When data values drop below the Must
Turn Qtt Value, no voltage is supplied.
Must Turn On
When used with Discrete (Normally Low), the Must Turn On Value is a data
Value
value which, When reached, causes the DA0 to supply 10 VDC.
Discrete
(Normally High) A digital output in which the DAQ supplies 10 VDC until channel data values reach
the user-specified Must Turn off Value; then no voltage is supplied.
Must Turn On
When used with Discrete (Normally High), the Must Turn On Value is
Value
numerically smaller than the Must Turn Qft Value. When data values drop
below the Must Turn On Value, 10 VDC is supplied.
Must Turn Qtf
When used with Discrete (Normally High), the Must Turn off Value is a data
Value
value which, when reached, causes the DAQ to stop supplying voltage.
Alarm
(N~m,atty LOW) A digital output in which the DAQ supplies no voltage when data values lie within the
range described by the Low Limit and High Limit. When data values lie outside this
range, the DAQ supplies 10 VDC.
Low Limit
When the output type is Alarm (Normally Low), the Low Limit is the data value
below which the DAQ supplies 10 VDC.
High Limit
When the output type is Alarm (Normally Low), the High Limit is the data value
above which the DAQ supplies 10 VDC.
Alarm
(Normally Hlgh) A digital output in which the DAQ supplies 10 VDC when data values lie within the
range described by the Low Limit and High Limit. When data values lie outside this
range, the DAQ supplies no voltage.
Low Limit
When the output type is Alarm (Normally High), the Low Limlt is the data value
below which the DAQ supplies no voltage.
High Limit
When the output type is Alarm (Normally High), the High Limit is the data value
above which the DAQ supplies no voltage.
Page 7-l 2 August 7,1992

M/D TOTCO
CONFlGURATlON AND CALIBRATION chapter7
MANUAL 6046 INlTlAL SYSTEWDAQ CONFIGURATION
7-3-l 1 ADD + EDIT Channels
Use the ADD + EDIT option to add a channel to the System channel list and then edit the channel
and/or its associated sensor and output configurations as follows:
1. From the SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 7-3)

highlight ADD + EDIT and press ENTER. A submenu of available
channels is displayed. This submenu contains assigned and
unassigned channels. Assigned channels are listed by channel
name (i.e. Pit Volume 5); unassigned channels are listed by logical
channel number (i.e. Channel # 003).
2. To add an assigned channel, highlight the name of the channel to

add and then press ENTER.
To add an unassigned channel, highlight the logical channel number
and then press ENTER.
The Channel Configuration screen is displayed for ediiing.
3. Edit the configuration as described in Paragraph 7-3-9. When

finished, press the < ESC > key. The submenu is displayed.
4. To add/edit another channel, repeat Steps 2 and 3.
5. When all channels have been added/edited, press the < Esc > key.
The submenu is cbsed.
7-4 RIG ACTWITY STRING CONFIGURATION
Use this option to add and delete rig activities from the Rig Activii String list for VXC displays.
7-4-l Rlg Actlvlty
In the Confiiration and Calibration software, a rig activii, such as drilling or tripping, is a
category under which related VXC screens are placed. For example, you might group all screens
displaying channels related to drilling under DRILLING and all screensdisplaying channels
related to tripping under TRIPPING. This way, only screens pertinent to the selected rig activity
are displayed.
lndiviiual screens are assigned to rig activities using the “Set Screen Mode” field on the Screen
Configuration screen (Paragraph 9-612).
7-4-2 Rlg Acthtlty String
Rig Activii String entries list the order in which rig activities are displayed each time the RIG ACT
key is pressed. The defaults are DRILLING first, then TRIPPING and then CEMENTING. A
maximum of 20 rig activities are available. I

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6040
7-4-3 How to Edit the Rlg Activity String

To edit the rig activity string, highlight RIG ACTIVITY STRINGS: [EDITJ from the SYSTEMIDAQ
CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 7-3) and then press ENTER. The STRING CONFlGURATlON
screen is displayed (Figure 7-6). From this screen you can add and delete rig activities from the
configuration as folbws.
1. From the STRING CONFIGURATION screen, select the string to

edit. When selected, the string is displayed in reverse video
(STRING # 1 in Figure 76).
2. Type in the string name, up to 9 characters and press ENTER. The

new string name is displayed.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2, as needed, to name the rig a&ii strings.

4. When finished, press the < Esc > key or highlight [QUITI and press
ENTER. The SYSTEMIDAQ CONFIGURATION screen is
displayed.
Page 7-14 Augualt 7,1992

WDTOTCO
MANUAL W-40 INITIAL SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION
7-5 ALGORITHM CONFlGURATlON
Use this option to add algorithms to or delete them from the algorithm list and to edit algorithms.
An algorithm is a mathematical method for calculating data values from raw sensor input. When
the DAQ receives raw sensor input , it uses an algorithm that accounts for properties of the
sensor (i.e. sensor type, signal range, etc.) and the quantity being measured (i.e. mud volume,
hook load, etc.) to convert the raw input to engineering units.
CAUTION
Consult Field Engineering before using Algorithm Configuration. Complete
could result from improper usage.
7-5-l EDIT Algorithms
Lines may be deleted from or inserted into an algorithm. From the SYSTEWDAQ
Qualified personnel may obtain the password by contacting Field Engineering. Type in the
password: then press ENTER. An algorithm submenu is displayed. Highlight the algorithm to
edit and press ENTER. The algorithm is displayed. A typical algorithm is shown in Figure 7-7.
Algorithms are edited by deleting and inserting complete lines of text. Paragraphs 7-5-2 and
7-5-3 describe how to perform these two functions.
7-52 Delete Lines
To delete a line from an algorithm, refer to Figure 7-7 and follow the steps below:
1. From the algorithm screen, highlight DELETE and highlight the line
to delete; then press ENTER. The line is deleted.
2. Repeat Step 1 to delete lines, as needed.

3. To exit EDIT mode, press the < Esc > key or highlight QUIT and
press ENTER. The following message is displayed:
> OPTIONS <

SAVE ABORT
4. To save the deletions, highlight SAVE and press ENTER. To

disregard the deletions and keep the original algorithm script,
highlight ABORT and press ENTER. The SYSTEM/DAQ
CONFIGURATION screen is displayed.

M/D TOTCO
INITIAL SYSTEMfDAQ CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6040
Figure 7-7. Algorithm Screen
7-6-3 Insert Lines

To insert lines to an algorithm, refer to Figure 7-8 and follow the steps below:
1. . From the algorithm screen, highlight INSERT and highlight the line
that will lie below the inserted line; then press ENTER. For
example, to insert a line above line 3, highlight line 3. A submenu of
lines that can be inserted is displayed.
In this menu, %C represents any available channel. If you select a

line that contains %C, a list of available channels is displayed.
Highlight the appropriate channel and press ENTER.
2. Scroll through the list of lines and highlight the line to insert; then
highlight SELECT and press ENTER. The line is added.
3. To add another line immediately below the line added in Step 2,
repeat Step 2.
To add a line at a different location in the same algorithm, highlight

QUIT and press ENTER. The algorithm screen is displayed.
Repeat Steps 1 through 3.

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION ’ Chapter 7
MANUAL 60-40 INlTlAL SYSTWDAQ CONFIGURATION
4. To exit EDIT mode, press the c Esc > key or highlight QUIT and
press ENTER. The following message is displayed:
> OPTIONS <

SAVE ABORT
5. To save the changes, highlight SAVE and press ENTER. To

disregard the changes and keep the original algorithm script,
highlight ABORT and press ENTER. The SYSTEM/DAQ
CONFIGURATION Menu screen is displayed.
ELSE
END IF
END OF ALGORITHM
IF %C CONFIGURED
IF %C DISABLED
IF %C ENABLED j
IF %C NOT CONFIGURED =
IFX!=Y
1
Figure 7-8. EDIT Algorithm: Insert Line Screen

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL SYSTEMIDAQ CONFIGURATION MANUAL 8W0
7-8-4 ADD + EDlT Algorithms

Use this option to add new algorithms. First, the name of the new algorithm must be added to the
list of available algorithms; then the algorithm must b8 created, using [EDIT& To add an
algorithm, follow the steps below:
1. From the SYSTEMIDAQ CONFIGURATION Menu screen, highlight

ALGORITHMS: [ADD + EDlTj and press ENTER. The following
> Algorithm Configuration <

Algorithm name:
Return to system configuration menu.
2. Highlight “Algorithm name:” and type in the name of the new

algorithm; then press ENTER. This name may not exceed 13
characters (letters, numbers, blanks). A new algorithm screen is
Figure 7-9. [ADD + EDIT] Algorithm Screen

M/DTOTCO
MANUAL 6040 INITIAL SYSTEWDAQ CONFlGURbiTlON
3. HighligM INSERT and press ENTER. A submenu of lines to insert

is displayed (Figure 7-8). In this menu, %C represents any
available channel. If you select a line that contains %C, a channel
list is displayed. HighligM the desired channel and press ENTER.
4.
r NOTE
For an explanation of the other abbreviations in this menu (%V,
%I, etc.), contact Field Engineering.
HighligM the line to insert: then highligM SELECT and press

ENTER. The line is added to the algorithm.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4, as needed, to create the algorithm.

6. When the algorithm is complete, highligM QUIT and press ENTER.
7. To save the algorithm, highliiM SAVE and press ENTER. To

disregard the new algorithm, highligM ABORT and press ENTER.
The SYSTEMIDAQ CONFIGURATION Menu screen is d/splayed.
7-6-5 DELETE Algorithms
The last algorithm in the list of algorithms can be deleted. To delete the last listed algorithm from
the configuration, follow the steps below:
1. From the SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION Menu screen, highligM

ALGORITHMS: [DELETE] and press ENTER. A submenu
containing the most recently added algorithm is displayed.
2. To delete the algorithm listed, press ENTER. The following

> Algorithm Configuration <
Ii=
Algorithm name: XXXXXX
[DELETE]
1
Do not delete the algorithm
3. To keep the algorithm listed, highligM ABORT and press ENTER.

The SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION screen is displayed.
To delete the algorithm, highligM DELETE and press ENTER. The
SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION Menu screen is displayed, with a
submenu consisting of the last algorithm in the algorithm list.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3, as needed, to delete the needed algorithms.

Mm TOTCO
I<

INlTlAL SYSTEMIDAQ CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6Mg
7-6 TEN POINT TABLE CONFlGURATlON

Use this option to create up to four, ten point tables.
A ten point table describes the relationship between raw data values and engineering units, if the
relationship is not linear. It consists of 10 raw data values and their corresponding values in
engineering units.
Ten point tables can be used in Algorithm Configuration and in Calibration. In Algorithm
Configuration, they can be added to the algorithms for those channels whose raw data values do
not vary linearly with the engineering units they are displayed in. In Calibration, they are used in
calibrating EDMS sensors.
7-6-l Create a Ten Point Table

To create a ten point table to use in calibration, follow the steps below:
1. From the SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION Menu screen, highlight
TEN POINT TABLES: [EDIT] and then press ENTER. A submenu
of the four, ten point tables is displayed.
2. Highlight the ten point table to edit and press ENTER. The Ten
Point Table Configuration screen (Figure 7-l 0) is displayed.
3. Select the first line in the INPUT column. When selected, the arrow
to the left of the number is displayed in reverse video, as shown in
Figure 7-10.
4. Type in the number that represents the initial raw wunts received .
This number is the minimum raw counts displayed on the
CALIBRATION screen or on the INPUTS--RAW VALUES screen of
the DIAGNOSTICS function.
5. Select the first line in the OUTPUT column, then type in the number,
in engineering units, that corresponds to the initial raw counts
entered in the INPUT wlumn.
6. While increasing the sensor output, move down each column and
repeat Steps 3,4 and 5, as needed, to define the relationship
between raw counts and engineering units. It is not necessary to
enter 10 pairs of data.
7. When the last data pair has been typed in, press ENTER to save
the data. Then press the < Esc > key or highlight QUIT and press
ENTER. The SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION Menu screen is
displayed, with the Ten Point Table submenu displayed.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7, as needed, to edit other ten point tables

or press c Esc > to close the Ten Point Table submenu.

WDTOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION ctrapter7
MANUAL 6&40 INlTlAL SYSTEWDAQ CONFlGURATlON
CHANNEL, [CLEAR]
RIG ACTIVI
ALGORITH
TEN POIN
FLOPPY:
Figure 7-10. Ten Point Table Configuration Screen
7-7 EXlTlNG SYSTEWDAQ CONFlGURATlON
To exit SystemIDAQ configuration, press the < Esc > key from the SYSTEM/DAQ
CONFIGURATION screen or highlight QUIT and press ENTER. The message below is displayed:
> DAQ ACCESS <
> ATTENTION <
WOULD YOU LIKE TO SEND CONFIGURATION DATA

TO THE DAQ?
> OPTIONS <

ABORT
mm
Select SEND to send the new configuration to the DAQ and overwrite the configuration stored
there. Messages are displayed as pertinent configurations are sent to the DAQ.
Select ABORT to keep the new configuration in memory but not overwrite that in the DAQ. Note,
however, that if ABORT is selected, any subsequent operations, such as re-entering SystemIDAQ
configuration, will cause data retrieved from the DAQ to overwrite the new configuration in
memory.
The Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen is displayed.

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL SYSTEM/DA0 CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6WO
Page 7-22 Auglmt7,1992

WDTOTCO
CHAPTER EIGHT
INITIAL TIM CONFIGURATION
8-l INTRODUCTlON
The TIM (T-POT Interface Module) is a device used in conjunction with a printer/plotter to
generate paper plots of channel data. It converts data from the DAQ to a format that the
printer/plotter can read and then fowards the formatted data to the printer/plotter. This chapter
contains instructions for initial configuration of a TIM, which consists of the following:
. adding TlMs to and deleting TlMs from the system
l TIM channel configuration
. TIM print/plot configuration
Figure 8-1 outlines the general procedure for TIM configuration of a new system. For instructions
on modifying existing configurations, refer to Chapter 15.
8-2 THE TIM MASTER FILE
The TIM master file, MASTERT70, can only be loaded into memory if its extension is changed to
“010’. Thus, if the TOTAL system contains a TIM, we recommend renaming the TIM master file in
DOS, before initializing the Configuration and Calibration software. To do this, enter the following
command from the directory containing the master file:
RENAME MASTER.TlO MASTER.01 0
The master file is renamed and will be loaded automatically if the [LOAD ALL] option is used.
.
8-3 TlM DEVICE ID’s
The Configuration and Calibration software assigns each TIM a permanent number, called a
device ID. The ID of the first, or onfy, TIM is 0 (TIM #O); il an additional TIM is added, it is
assigned device ID #l . The device ID is not affected by the subsequent additiin or deletion of a
second TIM. For example, if TIM #O is deleted from a system containing two TIMs. the remaining
TIM will still be TIM #1 .
NOTE
The device ID must also be set at the TIM. Refer to the TIM manual for
instructions on setting the device ID at the TIM.
March 31,1993 Page 8-l

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL TIM CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6090
Exit TlM Conffguratbn and Send

Conflguratbn Data to the DAQ
P-graph 8-8)
Figure 8-1. Initial TIM Configuration Procedure

IWDTOTCO
MANUAL 60-40 INlTlAL TIM CONFIGURATION
8-4 ADD/DELETE DEVICES
Follow the steps below to add/delete TlMs from the system.
NOTE
A TOTAL system cannot contain more than two TIMs.
1. From the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu (Figure 4-2),

highlight “CONFIGURATION” and press ENTER. The submenu
shown in Figure 7-2 is displayed.
2. Highlight T-POT INTERFACE MODULE and press ENTER. The

TIM device screen (Figure 8-2) is displayed, indicating that there is
one TIM in the system (UNIT 0) and its device ID is 0.
[UNIT 0]
Press enter to quit and return to the main menu
Figure 8-2. TIM Device Screen
3. To add a TIM, highlight ADD and press ENTER. The TIM is added
to the system and [UNIT l] is displayed on the TIM device screen.
To delete a TIM, highlight DELETE below the device to be removed
and then press ENTER. The folbwing message is displayed:

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 8 CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRAWN
INlTlAL TIM CONflGURATlON MANUAL 804
> OPTIONS c
0 YES
191
Select NO to keep the TIM in the system. Select YES to delete it.
4. When the necessary devices have been added/deleted, the

remaining TlMs can be configured.
8-5 THE TIM CONFIGURATION MENU

To configure a TIM, highlight the TIM (UNIT 0, UNIT 1) from the TIM Device screen (Figure 8-2)
and press ENTER. The TIM Configuration Menu screen (Figure 8-3) is displayed. From this
screen, the following options are available:
. create a TIM channel list b deleting channels from an&or adding channels to the
DEVICE CHANNELS: [ED rT] submenu
. edit individual channel configurations
. add or delete prints/plots from the configuration
. edit print/plot configurations
DEVICE CHANNELS:
[ADD] [EDIT] [ADD + EDITI [DELETE]
DEVICE PRINT/PLOTS:
[ADD] (EDITJ [DELETE]
FLOPPY:
[SAVE] [LOAD]

iJ
F..,........~
‘.:.:.:.:.y.:.
m
m
:::::::y::::
###
:::::::::::t
Figure 6-3. TIM CONFIGURATION Screen
Page 8-4 Match 31,1883

MID TOTCO
MANUAL 6040 INlTlAL TIM CONFlGURATlON
6-6 DEVICE CHANNEL CONFlGURATlON
Use this option to create a channel list for the TIM and to edit channel configurations.
6-6-l TIM Channel List

The TIM channel list is displayed on the DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDITJ submenu (Figure 8-4). lt
should contain all channels available for print/plot display.
The TIM master file, MASTER.070, tags the most commonly printed/plotted channels as TIM
channels and it is these channels that make up the default DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT]
submenu. However, only channels on the System channel list (Paragraph 7-3-l) are available to
the TIM. Thus, if channels tagged for the TIM default channel list were deleted from the System
channel list during SYSTEMDAQ configuration, they are not available to the TIM. These
channels are designated as UNCONFIGURED on the DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT] submenu
and should be deleted.
NOTE
If a TIM is added to the system after SYSTEMIDAQ configuration, it has no
default channels (i.e. its DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDITJ submenu is empty).
However, all channels on the System channel list are listed on the DEVICE
CHANNELS: [ADD] submenu and can be added.
6-6-2 TIM Requlred Channels
All channels used as TIM Print/Plot Update Events must be on the TIM channel list.
.i:
.:.:
:: :
:‘i
ii
..:.
::::
.._.
-,
i;;;
:.::
....
::::
i......... . . . . . . L. . . . . . . . . i...
./:
::::
1:
.:::
:.:
..:-
. .. .
::::
:::
.;:i
:::
.. . .
.A.
DEVICE CHANNELS:
.:.:
:.>
.::
;:;:
[ADD] 1 II II
..:
....
..:
: I
: ::
::::
:::
DEVICE PRINT/PLOTS: [ADD1 lEDI
j.j:
:..
....
....
;;i
:.:.
ii:
:.:.
_I.
.L.
.;:;
::::
::-
:::
.i
:: :
:.:.
i..
i..
.A.
..i
:i
..i
..i
:.:’
Press enter to quit and return to
::j
:;:
:::
:i
.;:
. . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .
Figure 8-4. MASTERTIO Defauft Channel List
August 7,1992 Psgs 6-5

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL TIM CONflGURATlON MANUAL 80-40
8-6-3 DeviceSpecific Channel (XXXXXX..cHN)

A device-specific channel is listed on the DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] submenu. This channel is
named XXXXXX.CcHN, where XXXXXX represents the name of the master files or data files
loaded from floppy. The purpose of this channel is to provide the name of the master files or data
files used and the date that the files were created or last edited.
To view the creation date, follow the steps below:
1. Add the channel to the TIM channel list by highlighting it and then
pressing ENTER. The channel is removed from the ADD submenu.
2. Press the < Esc > key to exit the ADD submenu.
3. Highlight EDIT and press ENTER. The EDIT submenu is displayed.
4. Press the END key to go to the end of the submenu. The device
master channel is highlighted.
5. Press ENTER. The device master channel screen is displayed

(Figure 6-5). The date that the file was created or last edited is
presented to the right of the file name, as day-month-year. For
example, in Figure 8-5, the MASTER.CHN wnfiiratbn was used
and it was created or last edited on May 6,1992.
6. To exit the screen, press the &sc > key or highlight QUIT and
press ENTER.
Figure 8-5. TIM-Specific Channel Configuration Screen

MIDTOE
MANUAL 6g-40 INlTlAL TIM CONFIGURATION
6-6-4 ADD Channels

Use the DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] option to add channels to the TIM channel list, as follows:
1. From the TIM CONFlGURATlON screen (Figure 8-3), highlight ADD

and press ENTER. A submenu of available channels is displayed.
2. Highlight the channel to add and then press ENTER. The channel
is added to the TIM channel list and removed from the submenu.
4. When the necessary channels have been added, press the c Esc >
Use the DEVICE CHANNELS: [DELETE] option to remove channels from the TIM channel list, as
follows:
1. From the TIM CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 8-3), highlight
DELETE and press ENTER. The TIM channel list is displayed.
channel is removed from the TIM channel list and from the submenu.
4. When the necessary channels have been deleted, press the <Esc>

MID TOTCO
Chapter 8 CONFlGURATlON AND CALIBRATION
8-8-8 EDIT Device Channel Conflguratlon

Use the DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT) option to edit TIM channel configurations. From the TIM
CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 8-3) highlight EDIT and then press ENTER. The TIM channel
list is displayed. (Figure 8-4). Highlight the desired channel and press ENTER. The Device
Channel Configuration screen for that channel is displayed (Figure 8-6). Paragraph 8-6-7
explains how to edit the device channel configuration and Paragraph 8-6-8 summarizes each field
on this screen.
Figure 8-6. TIM Device Channel Configuration Screen

MID TOTCO
MANUAL -40 INITIAL TIM CONFIGURATION
9-67 How to Edit a Device Channel Conflguratlon
Use the arrow keys or MOUSE to select fields on the Device Channel Configuration screen.
When selected, a field is displayed in reverse video and an instruction line explaining how to edit
the field is displayed at the bottom of the screen. For example, in Figure 8-6 , “High high limit” is
selected and the instruction line reads “Enter new value, (or <D> to disable) then press
<ENTER>“.
To edit a Device Channel Configuration screen field, follow the steps below:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the field name. The name is
displayed in reverse video (Figure 8-6).
2. Type in the desired value for the field and press ENTER. The new
value replaces the old one.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2, to edit the necessary fields.
4. When all edits are made, press the < Esc > key or highlight QUIT
and press ENTER. The TIM CONFIGURATION screen is displayed.
9-6-9 Device Channel Conflguratlon Screen Fields
The six fiebs on a Device Channel Configuration screen are summarized below.
Low low llmlt - “LLA” is plotted to the left of values that lie below the Low bw limit.
Low llmlt - “LA” is plotted to the left of values that lie bebw the Low limit.
Hlgh llmlt - “HA” is plotted to the right of values that lie above the High limit.
Hlgh high llmlt - “HHA” is plotted to the right of values that lie above the High high limit.
Low plot scale - contains the value represented on the left side of paper plots. The value may
not exceed 8 characters (numbers and decimals).
High plot scale - contains the value represented on the right side of paper plots. The value may
not exceed 8 characters (numbers and decimals).
9+9 ADD + EDlT Channels
Use the ADD + EDIT optbn to add a channel to the TIM channel list and then edit the channel
configuration as follows:
1. From the TlM CONFIGURATION screen (Figure a-3), highlight

DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD + EDIT] and press ENTER. A
submenu of available channels is displayed.
2. Highlight the channel to add and then press ENTER. The Device
Channel Configuration screen for that channel is displayed for
editing.
3. Edit the configuration as described in Paragraph 8-6-8.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3, as needed, to add and edit channels.
5. When the last channel has been added/edited, press the < Esc >
key from the ADD + EDIT submenu. The TIM CONFIGURATION
screen is dispfayed.
August 7,1992 PaOe6-9

MID TOTCO
Chapter 8 CONRGURATION AND CALIBRATION
8-7 PRINT/PLOT CONFlGURATlON

Using a TIM and an Epson LG2550 or HP Paint Jet printer, real-time data can be displayed on
paper plots. The TIM converts DAQ data into a format that the printer can read and forwards the
formatted data to the printer. PLOT CONFIGURATION is used to create, modify and delete the
plot configurations that describe these paper plots and to add and delete devices for which pbt
configurations can be generated.
Epson-generated plots contain up to eight columns; HP-generated plots contain up to five

columns. The first column of each plot is numerical and contains time and depth data, provided
those channels are defined in the system. All other columns contain data for a maximum of three
channels per column, displayed numerically or graphically in user-specified colors. Within each
column, all data must be displayed either numerically or graphically. A typical HP plot is shown in
Figure 8-7.
A maximum of 20 plot configurations can be assigned to each TIM.
8-7-l Plot Types

Three types of plots are available:
. Prtnt - data is displayed numerically; data values for each channel are printed at the
rate the data is sampled (sample rate).
. Plot - data is displa ed graphically as points on a scaled chart; data values are held
in a buffer until 24 CL a values are wlbcted and then they are pbtted.
l Mfxed - contains columns of numerically displayed data and columns of graphical
displayed data. Graphical data is heb in a buffer until 24 data values are wlbct eir ;
then all 24 data points are lotted. Numerical data for one channel is printed each
time 24 data values are w Plected. Within each numerical column:
- if there is one numerical channel, then every 24th data value is printed.
- If there are two numerical channels, then every 48th data value is
printed, with the first channel listed printed after the first 24 data points
and the second channel printed after the first 48 data points are wllected.
- If there are three numerical channels, then eve 72nd data value .b
rinted. The first channel value is printed after rl e first 24 data points
Phe second channel value is rtnted after the first 48 data points and the
third channel value is print elf after the first 72 data points are wllected.
8-7-2 The Plot Header

In Column One, the header contains the name of the Master Channel, i.e., the channel upon
which the sample rate is based (Update event, Paragraph 6-7-7). In all remaining wlumns, the
header contains the name and units of each channel displayed in the column. lf the column
contains printed data values, the header wntalns the alarm limits for each channel. If the wlurm
contains pbtted data, the header contains the left and right limits of the plot.
87-3 Plot scales

Each graphical data column is divided vertically into fourths: O-25%, 25%50?& 50%-75% and
75%-100% of the range in plot values for each channel in the column. For example, in Column
Two in Figure 8-7, the vertical lines represent 40,80 and 120 k-lbs for HOOK LOAD and 20,40
and 60 k-lbs for BIT WEIGHT.
The area between horizontal lines in graphical data columns contains fii data points.
In graphical data wlumns, wbrwded ammos are used to represent data values that lie outside
the plot range. These arrows are plotted in the color of the channel whose data value is out of
the plot range and point in the direction that the data point would lie if it were plotted.

MIDTOTCO
MANUAL W-40 INlTlAL TIM CONFlGURATlON
DRILLPUYH 16sEp-9911Ozol
oozo6 5280.0
oozo6 5280.0
cm7 !5!280.0
. ..
ooa 5ao.o i
Figure 8-7. Typical HP Plot
August 7,1882 Page &l 1

MID TOTCO
INKIAL TM CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6040
8-7-4 Alarm IndkatOt’S

In numerical data columns, “LLA” or “LA” is plotted to the left of values that lie below the Low Low
or Low alarm limit. Likewise, “HHA” and “HA” is plotted to the right of values that lie above the
High or High High alarm limit.
8-7-5 EDIT Plot Configurations

Use the DEVICE PRINT/PLOTS: [EDIT] option to edit existing TIM plot configurations.
From the TIM CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 6-3), highlight EDIT and then press ENTER. A
submenu of existing print/plots is displayed. Highlight the desired print/plot and press ENTER.
The Print/Plot Configuration screen for that print/plot is displayed (Figure 8-6). Paragraph 8-7-6
explains how to edit the Print/Plot Configuration screen and Paragraph 8-7-7 summarizes each
field on this screen.
Column 2
Channel 1
Column 2
Channel 2
Column 2
Chaffff8/ 3
Column 3
Channel 1
Column 3
Chaffff8lZ
Column 3
Channel 3
Figure 88. Print/Plot Configuration Screen

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 604 INITIAL TIM CONFIGURATION
8-7-6 How to Edlt a Print/Plot Configuration
Figure 8-8 is the Print/Plot Configuration screen that describes the plot shown in Figure 8-7.
Refer to these two figures while reading this paragraph. On the Print/Plot Configuration screen,
each six-line block describes one column on the paper plot. From left to right, the upper row of
blocks describes plot columns two, four, six and eight, and the bottom row describes plot columns
three, five and seven. The first, third and fifth lines in each block contain the names of channels
displayed in that column. The second, fourth and sixth lines describe the color and display type
(print or plot) for each channel.
Use the arrow keys or MOUSE to select fields on the Print/Plot Configuration screen. When the
Print/Plot name, Print/Plot type, Update event and Update interval fields are selected, they
appear in reverse video. When any other field on the screen is selected, a white box is displayed
to the left of the field name. When a field is selected, an instruction line explaining how to edit the
field is displayed at the bottom of the screen. For example, in Figure 8-8, the “ name
field is selected and the instruction is to “ print/plot name
How a field is edited depends upon the type of field it is. The Print/Plot Configuration screen
contains two field types. One type requires you to type in a value using the keyboard. To change
the field value, type in the new value and press ENTER; the new value is displayed. The two
fields listed below are this type:
. Print/Plot name
. Update interval
A second field type provides a submenu of selections. To edit this field type, highlight the field
and then press ENTER; the submenu is displayed. Then use the arrow keys to select a submenu
item and press ENTER; the new selection is displayed. The following fields are this type:
. All channel name fields
. All channel display type/display color fields
. Print / Plot type
. Update event
When all edits have been made, press the c Esc > key or highlight QUIT and press ENTER. The
TIM CONFIGURATION screen is displayed.
6-7-7 Print/Plot Configuration Screen Fields

The fields on the Print/Plot Configuration screen are summarized below.
Print/Plot name - contains the name of the plot (maximum 13 characters).
Channel Name - contains the name of the channel whose data is displayed. Three channels
may be displayed per column.
update
Color - contains the display wbr of the channel listed immediately above it.
update ” Master ”
PrlnUPlot type - contains PLOT, PRINT or MIXED, depending upon whether data is displayed
graphically (PLOT), numerically (PRINT) or both graphically and numerically (MIXED). On
MIXED displays, within each three-channel column, either printed or plotted data can be
displayed. The display type of the first channel in each column determines the display type
for the other channels in that column.
Update event - The rate that data is sampled for the plot is based upon the “ interval and
upon changes in the data values of a user-specified channel; this channel is referred to as
the “ event or “ Channel (Table 8-l).

M/D TOTCO
Chapter8 CONFlGURATlON AND CALlBRAllON
INlTlAL TIM CONFlGURATlON MANUAL 6Mo
Table &l. Plot Conflguratlon Update Events and Update lntemals
Update Event Update Interval Dsscrlptkn
‘TIME 1 Data for the plot is sampled at a rate of once per second.
TIME 60 Data for the plot is sampled at a rate of once per minute.
‘DEPTH 1 Data for the plot is sampled once per drilled foot.
DEPTH .l Data for the plot is sampled once per tenth of a drilled
foot (used with a shaft encoder).
DATE 1 Data for the plot is sampled once every tenth of a

24-hour period.
Channel 1 Data for the plot is sampled each time there is a .l

change in the data value (in engineering units) of the
specified channel. For example, if HOOK LOAD is the
update event and its units are k-lbs, then data for the plot
is sampled every time the HOOK LOAD data value
changes by .l k-lb& or 100 lbs.
Channel 10 Data for the plot is sampled each time the data value of
the specified channel changes by one engineering unit.
For example, if HOOK LOAD is the update event and its
units are k-lbs, then data for the pbt is sampled every
time the HOOK LOAD data value changes by 1 k-lb, or
1060 Ibs.
l “TIME” and “DEPTH” are the recommended update events.
Update lntewal - Use the “update interval” to sample data at a rate slower than that defined by
the “update event”. The update interval is a multiple of the update event; it is the number of
times the update event must occur before data is sampled for the plot. For example, if the
update event is TIME and the update interval is 66, then data is sampled once every 66
seconds.
The maximum update interval is 258; i.e. the slowest rate that data can be recorded is 268
times the rate of the update event. For TIME, thii is 266 seconds. For DEPTH, if the
channel units are feet, this is 25.6 feet.
Page 8-14 AugustI, 1882

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 60-40 INlTlAL TIM CONFIGURATlON
8-7-8 ADD Plots
Use the DEVICE PRINT/PLOTS: [ADD] option to add new plots to the TIM configuration. A
maximum of 20 plot configurations can be assigned. To add plots, follow the steps below:
1. From the TIM CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 8-3) highlight ADD
and press ENTER. A default Print/Plot Configuration screen is
2. Refer to Paragraphs 8-7-6 and 8-7-7 to edit the default screen to

describe the plot configuration.
3. When complete, press the < Esc > key. The TIM
CONFIGURATION Menu screen is displayed.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3, as needed, to add print/plots.
Figure 8-9. Default Print/Plot Configuration Screen

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL TIM CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6Mg
8-7-9 DELETE Plots

Use the DEVICE PRINT/PLOTS: [DELETE] option to delete TIM print/plots, as follows:
1. From the TIM CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 8-3) highlight

DELETE and press ENTER. A submenu of print/plots is displayed.
2. Highlight the appropriate print/plot and press ENTER. The following

i-- OPTIONS cYESi
3. Select NO to keep the print/plot; select YES to delete it. The TIM
CONFIGURATION screen and DELETE submenu are displayed.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3, as needed, to delete print/pbt configurations.
5. To exit, press the c Esc > key. The submenu is closed and the TIM
8-8 EXlTlNG TIM CONFIGURATION

To exit TIM Configuration, press the c Esc > key or highlight QUIT from the TIM
CONFIGURATION screen and press ENTER. The TIM Device Screen (Figure 8-2) is displayed.
To add or edit another TIM, make the appropriate selection. To exit, pressihe <Esc > key or
highlight QUIT and press ENTER. The following message is displayed:
> DAQ ACCESS c
> ATTENTION <

TO THE DAQ?
> OPTIONS <

ABORT
m
Select SEND to send the new configuration to the DAQ and overwrite the wnfguration stored
Select ABORT to keep the new configuration in memory but not overwrite that stored in the DAQ.
Note, however, that if ABORT is selected, any subsequent operations, such as reentering TIM
Configuration, will cause data retrieved from the DAQ to overwrite the new configuration in
memory.
Page &16 August 7,1992

M/D TOTCO
CHAPTER NINE
INITIAL VXC CONFIGURATION
9-l INTRODUCTlON
The VXC (Visubgger XC Graphics Display) is a monitor, with attaching keypad, that is primarily
used to display channel data received from the DAQ. Data can he displayed numerically and
graphically, in horizontal bar graphs and vertical strip charts. The VXC also wntrols an alarm
horn that sounds when data values exceed user-specified limits.
This chapter contains instructions for initial configuration of a VXC, which consists of the following:
. adding VXCs to and deleting VXCs from the system
. VXC channel configuration
. VXC screen configuration
. VXC recorder configuration
Figure 9-l outlines the general procedure for VXC configuration of a new system. For
9-2 VXC DEVICE ID’s
The Configuration and Calibration software assigns each VXC a permanent number, called a
device ID. The ID of the first, or only, VXC is 0 (VXC #O); if a VXC is added, it is assigned ID #l.
The device ID is not affected by subsequent VXC addition or deletion. For example, if VXC #IOis
deleted from a system containing two VXCs, the remaining VXC will still be VXC #l .
NOTE
The device ID must also be set at the VXC. Refer to Manual 80-20 for
instructions on setting the device ID at the VXC.
Follow the steps below to add/delete VXCs from the system.
NOTE
A TOTAL system cannot contain more than two VXCs.
I I

2. Highlight VISULQGGER XC GRAPHICS DISPLAY and press
ENTER. The VXC device screen (Figure 9-2) is displayed,
indicating that there is one VXC in the system (UNIT 0) and its
device ID is 0.
March 31,1993 Page 91

MD TOTCO
INlTlAL VXC CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6Mo
Add VXC’s to or Delete VXc’s from

the system
(Paragraph 9-3)
I
Configure Device Channels
(Paragraph 9-5)
I
Create VXC Channel
List by Deletlng Edit lndlvldual Channel
Channels, If needed
Figure 9-l. Initial VXC Configuration Procedure

MID TOTCO
MANUAL 6&40 INITIAL VXC CONFlGURATlON
3. To add a VXC, highlight ADD and press ENTER. The VXC is added
to the system and [UNIT l] is displayed on the VXC device screen.
To delete a VXC, highlight DELETE below the device to be removed
and then press ENTER. The following message is displayed:
> OPTIONS <

0 YES
ma
L
Select NO to keep the VXC in the system. Select YES to delete it.
4. When the necessary devices have been added/deleted, each
device can be configured. To select and configure a VXC, refer to
Paragraph 9-4.
[UNIT 0]
[DELETE]
Figure 9-2. VXC Device Screen

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 9 CONRGURATION AND CALIBRATlON
INlTlAL VXC CONFlGURATlON MANUAL 6@4g
9-4 THE VXC CONFIGURATION SCREEN

To configure a VXC, highlight the VXC (UNIT 0, UNIT 1) from the VXC Device screen (Figure 9-2)
and press ENTER. The VXC CONFIGURATION screen is displayed (Figure 9-3). From this
screen, the following options are available:
. create a VXC channel list by deleting channels from and/or adding channels to the
DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT] submenu
. edit individual channel configurations
. add or delete screens from the configuration
. edit screen configurations
. add or delete recorders from the configuration
l edit recorder configurations
DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] [EDIT] [ADD + EDlTj [DEL&
DEVICE SCREENS: [ADD] [ED177 [DELETE]
DEVICE RECORDERS: [ADD] [EDITI [DELETE]
Figure 9-3. VXC CONFIGURATION Screen

MiDTom
MANUAL 50-40 INITIAL VXC CONFIGURATION
9-5 DEVICE CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
Use this option to create a channel list for the VXC and to edit channel configurations.
9-5-l VXC Channel List

The VXC channel list is displayed on the DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDITJ submenu (Figure 9-4). It
should contain all channels available for VXC display.
The VXC master file, MASTER.UZU, tags the most commonly displayed channels as VXC
lannels and it is these channels that make up the defautt DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT]
the VXC. Thus, if channels tagged for the VXC defauit channel list were deleted from the System
channel list, they are not available to the VXC. These channels are designated as
UNCONFIGURED on the DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT] submenu and should be deleted.
NOTE
If a VXC is added to the system after SYSTEMIDAQ configuration, it has
no default channels (i.e. its DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDITJ submenu is
empty). However, all channels on the System channel list are listed on the
DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] submenu and can be added.
9-5-2 VXC Required Channels
TIME and DATE are required VXC channels. Make sure that they are on the VXC channel list.
CAUTION
Do not delete the TIME or DATE channel from the VXC channel list, as
these channels are required for correct VXC display of channel data values.

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL VXC CONFlGURATlON MANUAL 6Mo
Operation Level: Graphics

Primary Channel: DEPTH
DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] [1
DEVICE SCREENS: [ADD] [ED11
DEVICE RECORDERS: [ADD] (ED11
FLOPPY: [SAV
[WI
Press enter to editI
Figure 9-4. MASTER.020 Defaulf Channel List
96-3 Devlcdpeclflc Channel (XXXXXX.cHN)

named XXXXXX.CffN, where XXXXXXrepresents the name of the master files or data files
files used and the date that the files were created or last ediied.
1. Add the channel to the VXC channel list by highlighting it and then
2. Press the < Esc > key to exif the ADD submenu.
3. Highlight EDlT and press ENTER. The EDIT submenu is displayed.
(Figure 9-5). The date that the tile was created or last edfted is
example, in Figure 9-5, the MASTERCHN configuration was used
and it was created or last edited on May 6,1992.
6. To exif the screen, press the &sc > key or highlight QUIT and
press ENTER.
Page 9-9 August 7.1992

WDTOTCO
MANUAL W-40 INITIAL VXC CONFIGURATION
Figure 9-5. VXC-Specific Channel Configuration Screen
9-5-4 internal Channel
INTERNAL CHN is the name of an internal channel that records the rate at which the VXC screen
is being updated. It is used for diagnostic purposes and is listed at the end of the DEVICE
CHANNELS: [ADD] submenu.
9-5-5 ADD Channels
Use the DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] option to add channels to the VXC channel list, as follows:
1. From the VXC CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 9-3) highlight

ADD and press ENTER. A submenu of available channels is
displayed.
is added to the VXC channel list and removed from the submenu.

4. When the necessary channels have been added, press the < Esc >

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL VXC CONFlGURATlON MANUAL 6&4g

Use the DEVICE CHANNELS: [DELETE] option to remove channels from the VXC channel list,
as follows:

DELETE and press ENTER. The VXC channel list is displayed.

channel is removed from the VXC channel list and from the
submenu.
9-57 EDIT Device Channel Conflguratlon

Use the DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT] option to edif VXC channel configurations. From the VXC
CONFlGURATlON screen (Figure 9-3), highlight EDIT and then press ENTER. The VXC channel
list is displayed. (Figure 9-4). Highlight the desired channel and press ENTER. The Device
Channel Configuration screen for that channel is displayed (Fgure 9-6). Paragraph 9-5-6
explains how to edit the device channel configuration and Paragraph 9-5-9 summarizes each field
on this screen.
Figure 9-6. VXC Device Channel Configuration Screen

WDTOTCO
I
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION ” ” Chapter9
MANUAL 6040 INITIAL VXC CONfIGURATION
9-6-6 How to Edlt a Device Channel Configuration
Use the arrow keys or MOUSE to select fields on the Device Channel Configuration screen.
When selected, a field is displayed in reverse video and an instruction line explaining how to edit
the field is displayed at the bottom of the screen. For example, in Figure 9-6 , “High bar scale” is
selected and the instruction line reads “Enter new value, then press <ENTER>.“.
How a field is edited depends upon the type of field it is. The Device Channel Configuration
screen contains two types of fields. One type requires you to type in a value using the keyboard.
To change the field value, highlight the field, then type in the new value and press ENTER; the
new value replaces the old one. The following fields are this type:
. Low strip scale . Low lim it
. High strip scale . High lim it
. Low bar scale . Low bw lim it
. High bar scale . High high lim it
The second field type provides a submenu of available selections. To edit this field type, highlight
the field and then press ENTER; a submenu is displayed. Then use the arrOw keys to highlight a
submenu item and press ENTER. The new selection is displayed. The “Horn” field is this type.
When all edits are made, press the c Esc > key. The VXC CONFIGURATION screen is displayed.
9-59 Device Channel Configuration Screen Fields
The nine fields on a Device Channel Configuration screen are summarized below.
Low strip scale - the value to plot on the left side of the strip chart for this channel
High strip scale - the value to plot on the right side of the strip chart for this channel
Low bar scale - the value represented on the left side of the horizontal bar graph for this channel
High bar scale - the value represented on the right side of the horizontal bar graph for this
channel on the VXC display
Low limit - the data value below which an alarm will sound at the VXC. This data value may not
exceed eight characters (numbers and decimal points). lf no alarm is desired, enter
“DISABLED” in this field.
Hlgh limtt - the data value above which an alarm will sound at the VXC. This data value may not
exceed eight characters (numbers and decimal points). If no alarm is desired, enter
“DISABLED” in this field.
Low low Ilmtt -the data value (maximum of eight characters, numbers and decimal points)
below which an alarm will sound at the VXC. An alarm sounds for the “Low bw lim it” and
“Low lim it”. When used with “Low lim it”, the “Low bw lim it” must be smaller than the “Low
lim tt”. If no alarm is desired, enter “DISABLED” in this field.
High high limit -the data value (maximum of eight characters, numbers and decimal points)
above which an alarm will sound at the VXC. An alarm sounds for the “High high lim it” and
“High lim it”. When used with “High lim it”, the “High high lim it” must be greater than the
“High lim it”. lf no alarm is desired, enter “DISABLED” in this field.
Horn - wntrols whether the channel’s alarm horn will sound at the VXC when alarm lim its are
reached. If “enabled” is selected, then the channel’s alarm horn will sound when alarm
lim its are reached. If “disabled” is selected, then the channel’s alarm horn will not sound,
even if its alarm lim its are reached.

MID TOTCO
INITIAL VXC CONFIGURATION MANlJAL6WO
4510 ADD + EDIT Channels

Use the ADD + EDIT option to add a channel to the VXC channel list and then edit the channel

editing.
3. Edit the configuration as descrtbed in Paragraph 9-5-8.
5. When the last channel has been added/ediied, press the < Esc >
key from the ADD + EDIT submenu. The VXC CONFIGURATION

WDTOTCO
I
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION chaptef 9
MANUAL 6c)40 INlTlAL VXC CONFIGURATION
9-6 DEVICE SCREEN CONFlGURATlON
Use this option to configure VXC display screens and to add/delete screen configurations. Six
screen types are available for displaying real-time data. Data can be displayed numerically and
graphically, in horizontal bar graphs and vertical strip charts. Up to 20 screens can be assigned
to each VXC.
9-6-l VXC Screen Types
Six screen types are available for displaying real-time channel data numerically and/or
graphically. Channels whose data is displayed numerically are referred to as “alpha channels”;
channels whose data is displayed graphically are referred to as “strip chart channels”.
The six screen types are compared in Table 9-l and illustrated in Figures 9-7 through 9-12.
Table 9-1. VXC Screen Types

M/D TOTCO
INITIAL VXC CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6&4g
9-6-2 The NO STRIP CHARTS Screen

This screen type is illustrated in Figure 9-7. It can be used to display data for up to 20 channels.
From left to right, the screen contains:
. up to 10 left alpha channels - numerical display of channel data, updated at least
once per second; channel value is displayed in reverse video if the channel is in alarm
. horizontal bar graphs - graphical displays of left alpha channel data, updated at the
same rate as left alpha channels
. up to 10 right alpha channels - numerical display of channel data, updated at least
once per second; channel value is displayed in reverse video if the channel IS n alarm
[CHPNNELS
lw
l-KloKm 183.1 K-LRS 0.01 GAIN/LOSS 8~3~
@BIT WEIW 27.0 K-t& h-=! @PIT VOLDE1 187 mts
@TM ONBIT 28.7 m h-l@PITVOLLI'E2 108asls
RPM 70 rw &1K) PITVOLlE3 352 BBLS
PlMvFmuRE 23BolJsI iiiwwY3 PrrvoLlM4 36Eu
PLbPsm1 6s~~ h+ FLChHN 188 GR4
Pwsm2 65-l 03 FuxJolJT 18OGRl
Acarlm l9017!5T= " lurALt%s 490 LNITS
VEKION3.10 a4-JN-92) IAlAR INAcrrVEl
Figure 9-7. NO STRIP CHARTS Screen

W’DTOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Chamer 9
MANUAL 60-40 INKIAL VXC CONflGURblON
g-6-3 The ONE STRIP CHART Screen
. one strip chart - graphical display of one channel: current channel value is displayed
numerically below the chart, updated at least once per second and displayed in
reverse video if the channel is in alarm.
r I
2575 ~n Pws 122~M-92 11:34:461

A
PlJDVOLLPE 647 BBLS d mrALG4s bmavE
0 loo0
1 a32
MINLOSS 8~~s d
ll:33
@SRI 1 65s~ d
ll:33
43spM2 65 ,sa+t d
ll:33
mm 19017m I
ll:34
PWPPFES 2380 PSI d
FL&/ IN 188w d 1134
FLoclM 180 = 200 ll:34

490
TOTALG4S 490 um d
m1oN 3.10 wJN-92)
Figure 9-8. ONE STRIP CHART Screen
August7,1992 Page 913

M/D TOTCO
Chapter9 CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATlON
INlTlAL VXC CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6Mo
9-6-4 The TWO STRIP CHARTS Screen

. two strlp charts - graphical display of two channels: current channel value is
displayed numerically belcw the chart, updated at least once per second and
displayed in reverse video if the channel is in alarm.
0RIu.2 1 0fuulffi 1 2575 m ~PWS(22-JbMKll.#[

A
HooKLmD 183.1 K-IBS d F@f4 fw
0 J)
ll:32
BITWEIGHT a.0 K-l& d
4gbplrsm mofJ!sI d ll:?3
4$MUIT"TORQUE 310~41~s m-r=! Xl:33

flwspM1 65slw d .U:33
Fu&M2 65sw d lk34
FUN IN l8BGFM d
ll:34
fluNuT l8o@M d
, ll:3r(
MIDVOUME 64.7ms d
70 17.3
G4INAO.S 8~~s d WI4 FrAR
vE61m 3.10 KM-M-92) ~Al,mmwIvE~
Figure 9-9. TWO STRIP CHARTS Screen

M/D TOTCO
~-__-- -.~~. ~__
MANUAL 6040 INlTlAL VXC CONFlGURATlON
9-6-5 The THREE STRIP CHARTS Screen

l up to 10 left alpha channels - numerical display of channel data, updated at least
. three strip charts - graphical display of three channels: current channel value is
displayed numerically below the chart, updated at least once per second and
displayed in reverse video if the channel is in alarm.
DRILL1 2575 ~m SCALES122-M-92

11:34:461 ’
miMn
Fw 17.3 Fr/lft BITWEIU-IT RPM lw
0 40 O 100 0 30
HooKLaD 183.1 K-LB9 lx32 x32 ’
IN3 ll:33
4plwfas 238oPsI
+FXJLWTormuE 3101.~~ IN3 113

FwSpMl 65sRJl IX33 IL33
FtrPspM2 65sFFI ll:34 IN4
FLU4IN 188GcFI
U:34 ll:34
FLu4olr l&M
1 ll:34
MB VOLLPE 647 881s
70 17.3
GlIN/LOSS 8eas K-MS NM Fr/cR
VEFmN3.10 DHN-92) J/iLAmts1mvE]
Figure 9-10. THREE STRIP CHARTS Screen

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL VXC CONFIGURATION MANUAL 8&4g
9-8-8 The X - Y CHART Screm

This screen is designed for use with Drilbff software. Without Drilloff software, the screen can be
used to display data for up to 14 channels. From left to right, the screen contains:
. up to 10 alpha channels - numerical display of channel data, updated more than
l 4-channel chart - graphical display of data from four channels, plotted on one chart
Figure 9-l 1 is a typical “X - Y” CHART display.
1DRIUOFF 2575 tEm PEAKS[ZZ-M-92 1134:

mILLcFF2 llful.LoFF3 LmL#F4
BITDEPTH 2575.oFEr m-,
BHALENGTH 750.00 FEEr

80
OPm 1825.5 FEEr F
I I
plIwTTK2 65 s+l -3l.o -20.0 -10.0
PlPPPfE!s 2380 PSI

TESTBIT WT O-O
K-LB
Figure 9-11. X - Y CHART Screen

MIDTOTCO
MANUAL 6040 INlTlAL VXC CONFIGURATION
9-6-7 The FIVE STRIP CHARTS Screen
This screen displays data for up to five channels in strip charts. Current channel values are
displayed numerically below the charts and updated at least once per second. If the channel is in
alarm, the channel value is displayed in reverse video.
Figure 9-l 2 is a typical FIVE STRIP CHARTS display.
1 PITS ) CIfKUATIffi] 7671
ll:33 1133 ll33 ll:33
ll:33 Xl:33 ll:33 ll:33
ll33 ll:33 1133 1133
ll:34 ll:34 ll:34 WI4 ll:34
ll:34 ll:34 ll:3 1134 1134
A* 1134187 1134 am ll:34 ll:34 i
352
ll:34
mm
Figure 9-12. FIVE STRIP CHARTS Screen

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL VXC CONFIGURATION MANUAL 8WO
9-H Opetatlon Level

This field is displayed at the top of the VXC CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 9-3). It is used to
specify whether or not vertical strip charts will be displayed on any VXC screens. To select the
Operation Level, follow the steps below:
1. From the VXC CONFIGURATION screen, highlight Operation Level
and press ENTER. A submenu is displayed.
2. If vertical strip charts will be displayed on any VXC screens,

highlight “Graphics” and press ENTER.
If no vertical strip charts will be displayed, highfght “No graphics”
and press ENTER.
The menu is closed and the selection is displayed.
9-8-S Primary Channel

This field is displayed below “Operation Level” on the VXC CONFIGURATION screen (Figure
9-3). It is used to specify the primary channel for all VXC displays. The primary channel is the
channel whose data values are displayed at the top center of all VXC screens. For example,
DEPTH is the primary channel for the display screens in Figures 9-7 through 9-12 and the current
depth (i.e. 2575 FEET) is displayed.
To select the primary channel, follow the steps below:
1. From the VXC CONFIGURATION screen, highlight Primary

Channel and press ENTER. A submenu of selecledchannels is
displayed.
2. Highlight the appropriate channel and press ENTER. The menu is

closed and the channel name is displayed.
Page 9-18 August 7.1992

WDTolzo
MANUAL 6040 INITIAL VXC CONFIGURATION
9410 EDIT Screen Conflguratlons

Use the DEVICE SCREENS: [EDIT] option to edit existing VXC screen configurations.
From the VXC CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 9-3), highligM EDIT and press ENTER. A
submenu of screens is displayed. HighligM the desired screen and press ENTER. The Screen
Configuration screen is displayed (Figure 9-13). Paragraph 9-6-11 explains how to edit this
screen and Paragraph 9-6-l 2 summarizes each field on the screen.
Figure 9-13. VXC Screen Configuration Screen

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL VXC CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6WM
s-6-11 How to Edit a VXC Screen Configuration

Use the arrow keys or MOUSE to select a field on the SCREEN CONFIGURATION screen.
When selected, a field is displayed in reverse video, except for Alpha Channel and Chart Channel
fields, in which a black box appears to the left of the field name. An instruction line explaining
how to edit the selected field is displayed at the bottom of the screen. For example, in Fire
9-13, the “Set Screen Mode” field is selected and the instruction is to “Press ENTER to select
valid modes for this screen”.
How a field is edited depends upon the type of field it is. The VXC Configuration Screen contains
two field types. One type requires you to type in a value using the keyboard. To change the field
value, type in the new value and press ENTER; the new value is displayed. The following fields
are this type:
l Screen name
. Number of left alpha channels
. Number of right alpha channels
The second field type provides a submenu of available selections. To edit this field type, highlight
the field and then press ENTER; a submenu is displayed. Select the desired submenu item and
press ENTER; the new selection is displayed. The following fields are this type:
l Alpha channel fields (DEPTH to FLOW OUT in Figure 9-l 3)
. Chart channel fields (HOOK LOAD in Figure 9-13)
l Screen type
.
Recorder basis
l [SetScreen Mode]
When all edits are made, press the < Esc > key or highlight QUIT and press ENTER. The VXC
9-6-12 VXC Screen Conflguratlon F&Me

The fieMs on the VXC Screen Configuration screen are summarized below.
Screen Name - contains the name of the screen, up to 13 characters (letters, numbers, blanks).
Alpha Channel Fletlds - available for all screen types except “Five Strip Charts” when a
non-zero value is entered in the “Number of left alpha channels” or ‘!Number of right alpha
channels” field. Each alpha channel field contains the name of the channel displayed in
that location on the VXC screen. An alpha channel field may be left blank by selecting
“BLANK” from the alpha channel field submenu.
Chart Channel Fields - available for all screen types except “No Strip Charts”. Each chart
channel field contains the name of the channel whose data values are plotted on vertical
strip charts or on the X - Y charts. Achan may be left blank by selecting “BLANK” from the
chart channel field submenu.
NOTE ,
The channels available for strip chart display are determined by the
“Recorder basis”. Channels that were not assigned to the recorder in
Recorder Configuration are not available here (see Paragraph 9-7).
Screen type - contains the name of the selected screen type; i.e. “No Strip Charts”, etc.
Page 940 August I,1992

WDTOTCO
MANUAL 6040 INlTlAL VXC CONFIGURATlON
Number of left alpha channels - available for all screen types except “ Strip Charts This
field contains the number of channels to display in the left column, up to 10. An alpha
channel may be left blank by selecting “ from the alpha channel field submenu.
Number of right alpha channels - only available for the “ Strip Charts screen type; it
contains the number of channels to display in the right column, up to 10. An alpha channel
may be left blank by selecting “ from the alpha channel field submenu..
Recorder basis - the recorder used to sample data from the archive for strip chart display (see
Paragraph 9-7 for an explanation of device recorders).
[Set Screen Mode] - used to designate the Rig Activity modes, i.e. “ “ under
which the current screen can be displayed. When this field is selected, the SCREEN
MODE CONFIGURATION Menu screen (Figure 9-14) is displayed. Use this screen to
designate the rig activities with which the current screen will be associated, as follows:
To make the screen either available in all modes or not available in all modes, highlight the
screen name as shown in Figure 9-14 and then press ENTER. A submenu is displayed.
Highlight the appropriate item and press ENTER. The submenu is closed and the selection
is displayed.
,=> SCREEN MODE CONFIGURATION <=

pmqq tS AVAILABLE IN ALL MODES
II
Figure 9-14. SCREEN MODE CONFIGURATION Screen
To designate specific modes for which the screen is/not available, highlight the line for that
mode and press ENTER. A submenu is displayed (Figure 9-15). Highlight the appropriate
item and press ENTER. The submenu is closed and the selection is displayed.
-> SCREEN MODE CONFIGURATION <-
DRILL1 IS NOT AVAILABLE IN ALL MODES
N DRILLING
N TRIPPING
N CEMENTING
Press <ENTER> to select.
Figure 9-15. SCREEN MODE CONFIGURATION Screen: Submenu
August 7,1992 Page g-21

M/D TOTCO
INITIAL VXC CONFlGURATlON MANUAL 604
9-6-13 ADD Screenir

Use the DEVICE SCREENS: [ADD] option to add new screens to the VXC confllratbn. A
maximum of 20 screens can be assigned to one VXC. To add screens, follow the steps bebw:
1. From the VXC CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 9-3), highlight

ADD and press ENTER. A default Screen Configuration is
Figure 9-16. Default VXC Screen Configuration Screen
2. Refer to Paragraphs 9-6-11 and 9-6-12 to edit the default screen so

that it descrfbes the desired screen configuration.
3. When complete, press the < Esc > key. The VXC
CONFlGURATlON screen is displayed.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3, as needed, to add screens.
Page 9-22 Auglm 7,1992

WDTOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Cha#er9
MANUAL 60-40 INlTlAL VXC CONFlGURATlON
9-6-14 DELETE Bcreens

Use the DEVICE SCREENS: [DELETE} option to delete VXC screen configurations, as follows:
1. From the VXC CONFIGURATION screen (Figure g-3), highlight

DELETE and press ENTER. A submenu of available screens is
displayed.
2. Highlight the screen to delete and press ENTER. The following

I- OPTIONS <YE71
3. Select NO to keep the screen. Select YES to delete the screen.

The VXC CONFIGURATION screen and DELETE submenu are
disptayed.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3, as needed, to delete screen configurations.
5. To exit, press the < Esc > key. the submenu is cbsed and the VXC
August 7,1992 Page9-23

M/DTOTCO
INITIAL VXC CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6&4g
9-7 DEVICE RECORDER CONFlGURATlON

Use this option to configure VXC recorders and to add/delete recorder configurations. A device
recorder configuration describes the rate at which channel data is entered into the archive for
strip chart display and lists the VXC strip chart channels that the recorder is assigned to.
Up to 16 recorders can be assigned to one VXC (four per RAM device installed in sockets E, F, G
and H on the VXC memory board). Each recorder can hold records for up to 32 channels;
however the number of records that a recorder can hold is determined by the number of channels
assigned to it, as follows: NO. OF RECORDS = 4696 / NO. OF CHANNELS ASSIGNED
If the UPDATE EVERY, DO NOT UPDATE PAST and EVENT CHANNEL fields of two or more
Recorder Configuration screens contain the same values, the Recorder Name field of each
screen contains the same name and cannot be changed. This enables you to increase the
number of records that can be displayed for channels using the same recorder.
For example: You want to display 500 feet of data for 20 channels, and the update interval is one
foot. Thus, for each channel, 500 records must be archived. According to the above formula, if
all 20 channels were listed on one Recorder Configuration screen, only 264 records could be
archived by the recorder (4696 I 20 = 204). However, by creating three Recorder Configuration
screens that have the same Recorder Name, UPDATE EVENT, DO NOT UPDATE PAST and
EVENT CHANNEL fields and listing seven channels on each screen, 565 records (4696 / 7 =
565) could be archived and, consequently, displayed.
9-7-l EDIT Recorder Conflguration

Use the DEVICE RECORDERS: [EDIT] option to edit existing VXC recorder wnfiguratbns.
From the VXC CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 9-3), highlight EDtT and press ENTER. A
submenu of recorders is displayed. Highlight the recorder to edit and press ENTER. The
Recorder Configuration screen for the selected recorder is displayed (Figure 9-17). Paragraph
9-7-2 explains how to edit this screen and Paragraph 9-7-3 summarizes each field on the screen.
Figure 9-l 7. VXC Recorder Configuration Screen
Page 9-24 Augusf 7,1992

WDTOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION chaperg
MANUAL 6040 INlTlAL VXC CONflGURATlON
9-7-2 How to Edlt a VXC Recorder Conflgurstlon

Use the arrow keys or MOUSE to select a field on the Recorder Configuration screen. When
selected, a field is either displayed in reverse video or a black box appears to the left of the field
name and an instruction line is displayed at the bottom of the screen, explaining how to edii the
field. For example, in Figure 9-17, BIT WEIGHT is selected and the instruction is “Press
<ENTER> to change recorded channel.“.
How a field is edited depends upon the type of field it is. One type of field requires you to type in
a value using the keyboard. To change the field value, type in the new value and press ENTER;
the new value is displayed. The following fields are ediied this way:
. Recorder name
. Update every
. Do not update past
The second type of field provides a submenu of available selections. To edit this field type,
highlight the field and then press ENTER; a submenu is displayed. Select the desired submenu
item and press ENTER; the new selection is displayed. The following fields are this type:
. Event channel
. Direction
. All “Channels” fields
When all edits are made, press the < Esc > key or highlight QUIT and press ENTER The VXC
g-7-3 VXC Recorder Conflgurstlon Fields
The fields on the VXC Recorder Configuration screen are summarized below.
Recorder name - the name of the recorder, up to 13 characters. To prevent duplication of
recorders, this field is not available to edit until the recorder configuration has been edited.
Event channel - the channel used to determine the rate at which channel data is entered into
the archive for strip chart display. TIME and DEPTH are the recommended update events.
Update every - the quantity, in engineering units, that the event channel’s data value must
change before data is sampled from the archive for strip chart display.
Do not update past - the value displayed at the bottom of strip charts or on the right side of X-Y
charts. This field works in conjunction with the “Direction” field. If the direction is up, then
the “Do not update past” value is the maximum value for which data will be archived and all
lesser data values will be plotted above it . If the direction is down, then the “Do not update
past” value is the minimum value for which data will be archived and all greater values will
be plotted above it. This field is not used when the update event is TIME.
Dlmctlon - used in conjunction with “Do not update past”. See above.
Channels - each “Channels” field contains the name of a channel that will be recorded by this
recorder.

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL VXC CONFIGURATION MANUAL 604
9-74 ADD Recorders

Use the DEVICE RECORDERS: [ADD] option to add new recorders to the VXC configuration. A
maximum of 16 recorders can be assigned to one VXC. To add recorders, follow the steps below:
NOTE
When [ADD] is selected, a recorder with the same name and attributes as
the previousfy created recorder is displayed. The recorder name cannot be
changed until either the UPDATE EVERY, DO NOT UPDATE PAST or
EVENT CHANNEL field is changed, thereby defining a different recorder.
1. From the VXC CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 9-3) highligM

ADD and press ENTER. A defautl Recorder Configuration screen
similar to the one shown in Figure 9-17 is displayed.
2. Refer to Paragraphs 9-7-2 and 9-7-3 to edit the default screen so
that it describes the desired screen configuration.
3. When complete, press the < Esc > key. The VXC
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3, as needed, to add recorders.
9-745 DELETE Record~‘~

Use DEVICE RECORDERS: [DELETE] to delete VXC recorder configurations, as follows:
1. From the VXC CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 9-3) highligM
DELETE and press ENTER. A submenu of available recorders is
displayed.
2. HighlfgM the screen to delete and press ENTER. The following

> OPTIONS <

0 YES
ma
‘
3. Select NO to keep the recorder. Select YES to delete the recorder.

The VXC CONFIGURATION screen and DELETE submenu are
displayed.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3, as needed, to delete recorder configurations.
5. To exit, press the c Esc > key. the submenu is closed and the VXC

MID TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Ch8pter 9
MANUAL 60-40 INlTlAL VXC CONFIGURATION
9-6 EXlTlNG VXC CONFIGURATION
To exit VXC Configuration, press the c Esc > key or highlight QUIT from the VXC
CONFIGURATION screen and press ENTER. The VXC Device Screen (Figure 9-2) is displayed.
To add or edit another VXC, make the appropriate selection. To exit, press the cEsc > key or
> ATTENTION c

TO THE DAQ?
> OPTIONS <
m ABORT
Select SEND to send the new configuration to the DAQ and overwrite the configuration stored
Note, however, that if ABORT is selected, any subsequent operations, such as re-entering VXC
memory.

MID TOTCO
INlTlAL VXC CONFIGURATION MANUAL 60-40

MID TOTCO
CHAPTER TEN
INITIAL PCW CONFIGURATION
1Gl INTRODUCTION
The PCW (PC Workstation) is an IBM-compatible personal computer and monitor, with optional
plotter/printer. It uses the Visubgger Interface Program to display real-time and historical data on
the monitor and on paper and to compare data values to user-specified alarm limits. It also
stores data from the DAQ on the PC hard drive and can reformat these data files for import to
spreadsheet applications programs.
This chapter contains instructions for initial configuration of a PCW, which consists of the
following:
. adding PCWs to and deleting PCWs from the system
. PCW channel configuration
. PCW screen configuration
. PCW plot configuration
Figure 1O-l outlines the general procedure for PCW configuration of a new system. For
10-2 PCW DEVICE ID’s
The Configuration and Calibration software assigns each PCW a permanent number, called a
device ID. The ID of the first, or only, PCW is 0 (PCW #O) and additional PCWs are assigned ID
numbers beginning with 1 (PCW #l , PCW ##2). The device ID is not affected by subsequent
additions or deletions of PCWs. For example, if PCW #O is deleted from a system containing two
PCWs, the remaining PCW will still be PCW #l .
NOTE
The device ID must also be set at the PCW. Refer to the PCW manual to
set the device ID at the PCW.
l&3 ADD/DELETE DEVICES
Follow the steps below to add/delete PCWs from the system.
NOTE
A TOTAL system cannot contain more than three PCWs.

2. Highlight PC WORKSTATION and press ENTER. The PCW device
screen (Fire 10-2) is displayed, indbating that there is one PCW
in the system (UNIT 0) and its device ID is 0.
March31.1993 P8ge l&l

M/D TOT60
INlTlAL PCW CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6&4g
I
+ 1 I
+
I
Create PCW Channel Edit lndlvldual Channel

List by Deleting Conflguratlons
Channels, If needed
I I I I
I I
I
Confl ure Device Screens
(fjaragraph 104)
I Configure Device Plots

(Paragraph 10-7) I
Exlt PCW Configuration and Send

Conflguratlon Data to the DAQ
(Paragraph 1tH)
Figure 1 O-l. Initial PCW Configuration Procedure
Page l&2 March 31,1993

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6040 INITIAL PCW CONflGURATlON
3. To add a PCW, highlight ADD and press ENTER. The PCW is

added to the system and [UNIT 1] is displayed on the PCW device
screen.
To delete a PCW, highlight DELETE below the device to be
removed and then press ENTER. The following message is
displayed:
> NOTICE c
DELETESELECTED DEVICE?
I===
I
7
1
I& oPTloNS <YES1
Select NO to keep the PCW in the system. Select YES to delete it.
4. When the necessary devices have been added/deleted, the
remaining PCw’s can be configured. To select and configure a
PCW, refer to Paragraph 1O-4.
[ADD1 mm
Figure 10-2. PCW Device Screen
March 31,1993 Page 10-3

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL PCW CONFlGURATlON MANUAL 60-40
10-4 THE PCW CONFlGURATlON SCREEN

To configure a PCW, highlight the PCW (UNIT 0, UNlTl, UNIT 2) from the PCW Device screen
(Figure 1 O-2) and press ENTER. The PCW Configuration Menu screen is displayed. From this
screen (Figure 1 O-3), the following options are available:
. create a PCW channel list by deleting channels from an&or adding channels to the
DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT) submenu
l edit individual channel configurations
. add or delete screens from the configuration
. edit screen configurations
. add or delete plots from the configuration
9 edit plot configurations
.:::
:R?: DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] [EDIT) [ADD + EDlTj [DELETE]
DEVICE SCREENS: [ADD] [EDIT) [DELETE]
DEVICE PLOTS: [ADD] [EDIT] [DELETE]
Press enter to ctuit and return to the main menu
Figure 10-3. PCW CONFIGURATION Screen

LWDTOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATlON chqbter 10
MANUAL W4 INlTlAL PCW CONFIGURATlON
l&5 DEVICE CHANNEL CONFlGURATlON
Use this option to create a channel list for the PCW and to edit channel configurations.
1~5.1 Pew Channel List
The PCW channel list is displayed on the DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT] submenu (Figure 104). It
should contain all channels available for PCW display.
The PCW master file, MASTER.030, tags the most commonly displayed channels as PCW
channels and it is these channels that make up the defauft DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDITJ
the PCW. Thus, if channels tagged for the PCW default channel list were deleted from the
System channel list, they are not available to the PCW. These channels are designated as
UNCONFIGURED on the DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT] submenu and should be deleted.
NOTE
If a PCW is added to the system after SYSTEM/DAQ configuration, it has

no default channels (i.e. its DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT] submenu is
empty). However, all channels on the System channel list are listed on the
DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] submenu and can be added.
l&5-2 PCW Channel Requirements
DEPTH is a required PCW channel. lt is listed at the top of the PCW DEVICE CHANNELS:
[EDIT] submenu and cannot be deleted.
TIME and DATE should never be added to the PCW channel list, because TOTAL’s format for
these channels diem from that of the Visulogger Interface Program (VIP), which is typically run
on the PCW.
CAUTION
Do not add the TIME or DATE channel to the PCW channel list. The
difference in format between TOTAL and VIP for these two channels could
cause VIP to ignore entire data streams.
August 7,lggP Page10-5

MID TOTCO
INmAL PCW CONFlGURATlON MANUAL 6090
:.:
i:j
:i:
II11I/
::::
:::.:
:
:f:j:
DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] b
DEVICE SCREENS: [ADD1 lEDIll
FLOPPY: fSAVE
Press enter to edit de
Figure 104. MASTfR.03UDefault Channel List
l&53 Devk8-speclflc Channel (xxxxxx.MNJ

named XXXXXXCHN, where XXXXXX represents the name of the master files or data files
files used and the date that the files were created or last edited.
1. Add the channel to the PCW channel list by highlighting it and then
2. Press the c Esc > key to exit the ADD submenu.
3. Highlight EDIT and press ENTER. The EDIT submenu is displayed.

(Figure 1 O-5). The date that the file was created or last edited is
example, in Figure 10-5, the MASTER.CHN file was created or last
ediied on May 6,1992.
6. To exit the screen, press the &sc > key or highlight QUIT and
press ENTER.

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 60-40 INITIAL PCW CONFIGURATION
Figure 1 O-5. PCW-Specific Channel Configuration Screen
l&5-4 ADD Channels
Use the DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] option to add channels to the PCW channel list as follows:
1. From the PCW CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 103), highlght

ADD and press ENTER. A submenu of available channels is
displayed.
2. Highlight the channel to ackt and then press ENTER. The channel
is added to the PCW channel list and removed from the ADD
submenu.

4. When the necessary channels have been added, press the < Esc >
August 7,1992 Page l&7

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL PCW CONFIGURATION MANUAL @44I
l&s5 DELETE Channels

Use the DEVICE CHANNELS: [DELETE] option to remove channels from the PCW channel list
as follows:
1. From the PCW CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 10-3) highlight
DELETE and press ENTER. The PCW channel list is displayed.

channel is removed from the PCW channel list and from the
[DELETE] submenu.
10-5-6 EDlT Device Channel Conflguratlon

Use the DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT) option to edit PCW channel configurations. From the PCW
CONFIGURATION screen (Figure lo-3), highlight EDIT and then press ENTER. The PCW
channel list is displayed (Figure 10-4). Highlight the desired channel and press ENTER. The
Device Channel Configuration screen for that channel is displayed (Figure 10-6). Paragraph
1 O-5-7 explains how to edit the device channel configuration and Paragraph 1 O-5-6 summarizes
each field on this screen.
Figure 1 O-6. PCW Device Channel Configuration Screen
Page l&9 August 7,1992

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 604 INflIAL PCW WNFlGURATlON
l&5-7 How to Edlt a Device Channel Conflguratlon
Use the arrow keys or MOUSE to select a field on the Device Channel Configuration screen.
When a field is selected, it is displayed in reverse video and an instruction line explaining how to
edit the field is displayed at the bottom of the screen. For example, in Figure 10-6 , “QUIT” is
selected and the instruction line reads “Press ENTER to return to device configuration menu”.
How a field is edited depends upon the type of field it is. The Device Channel Configuration
screen contains two types of fields. One type requires you to type in a value using the keyboard.
To change the field value, highlight the field, then type in the new value and press ENTER; the
new value replaces the old one. The following fields are this type:
. Low scale
. High scale
. Low plot scale
. High plot scale
. Low limit
. High limit
The second fieb type provides a submenu of available selections. To edit this field type, highight
the field and then press ENTER; a submenu is displayed. Then use the arrow keys to highlight a
submenu item and press ENTER. The new selection is displayed. The “Horn” field is this type.
When all edits are made, press the c Esc > key. The PCW CONFIGURATION screen is
displayed.
10-58 Devke Channel Conflguratlon Screen Fields
The seven fields on a Device Channel Configuration screen are summarized below.
Low scale - the value to plot on the left side of the strip chart for this channel
High scale - the value to plot on the right side of the strip chart for this channel
Low plot scale - the value represented on the left side of paper plots
High scale - the value represented on the right side of paper plots
Low llmlt - the data value bebw which an alarm will sound at the PCW. This data value may not
exceed eight characters (numbers and decimal points).
Hlgh llmlt - the data value above which an alarm will sound at the PCW. This data value may not
exceed eight characters (numbers and decimal points).
Horn - wntrols whether the channel’s alarm horn will sound at the PCW when alarm limits are
reached. If “enabled” is selected, then the channel’s alann horn will sound when alarm
limits are reached. If “disabled” is selected, then the channel’s alarm horn will not sound,
even if its alarm limits are reached.
August 7,1992 Pagel&

M/D TOTW
INlTlAL PCW CONFlGURATlON MANUAL W-40
l&59 ADD + EDlT Channels

Use the ADD + EDIT option to add a channel to the PCW channel list and then edit the channel
1. From the PCW CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 1O-3), highlight

editing.
3. Edit the configuration as described in Paragraph 1O-5-7.

5. When the last channel has been added/edited, press the < Esc >
key from the ADD + EDIT submenu. The PCW CONFIGURATION

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6090 INlTlAL PCW WNFIGURATlON
10-6 DEVICE SCREEN CONFlGURATlON
Use this option to configure PCW display screens and to add/delete screen configurations. Three
screen types are available for displaying real-time and historical data. Data can be displayed
numerically and graphically, in horizontal bar graphs and vertical strip charts. Up to 14 screens
can be assigned to each PCW.
1&5-l PCW Screen Types
Three screen types are available for displaying real-time and historical channel data numerically
and/or graphically. Channels whose data is displayed numerically are referred to as “alpha
channels”; channels whose data is displayed graphically are referred to as “strip chart channels”.
The three screen types are compared in Table 10-l and illustrated in Figures 10-7 through 10-9.
Table l&l. PCW Screen Types
Screen Type Left Alpha Strlp Chart

Channels Channels
Two Strip 5 Alpha 5 Two
Two Strip 9 Alpha 9 Two
Five Strip Charts None Five
10-6-2 TWO STRIP 5 ALPHA Screen
Figure 1O-7 shows the TWO STRIP 5 ALPHA screen, used to display real-time data. Data points
are plotted at the rate of one record per minute, per second or per drilled foot, as specified. Alpha
channels are updated at the speed of the network, which is typically 2-3 times per second.
Current data values are displayed at the bottom of each chart, indicated by X’s in Figure 1O-7.
X DEPM ROP
DEPTH
5000 8000 1 10
ROP X
HOOK LOAD X
BlT WEIGHT X
TlME ON BIT X
X X
Figure 1O-7. TWO STRIP 5 ALPHA Screen

M/D TOTW
INlTlAL PCW CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6040
10-6-3 TWO STRIP 9 ALPHA Screen

Figure 10-8 shows the TWO STRIP 9 ALPHA screen, used to display real-time data. Data points
are plotted at the rate of one record per minute, per second or per drilled foot, as specified. Alpha
channels are updated at the speed of the network, which is typically 2-3 times per second. The
bar graphs show channel data relative to channel alarm limits. Current data values are displayed
at the bottom of each chart, indicated by X’s in Figure 10-8.
DEPTH ROP
DEPTH X
5000 8000 1 10
ROP X
HOOK LOAD X
BIT WEIGHT X
ROTARY TORQ X
ROTARY RPM X
TIME ON BIT X
PUMP PRESS X
PUMP STK 1 X
X X
Figure 1O-8. TWO STRIP 9 ALPHA Screen
10-M FIVE STRIP CHARTS Screen

Figure 1O-9 shows the FIVE STRIP CHARTS screen, used to display real-time or historical data.
Real-time data points are plotted at the rate of one record per minute, per second or per drilled
foot, as specified, and current data values are displayed at the bottom of each chart, indiied by
X’s in Figure 10-9.
Figure 1 O-9. FIVE STRIP CHARTS Screen

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6b40 INITIAL PCW CONFIGURATION
10-M EDIT Screen Conflguratlons
Use the DEVICE SCREENS: [EDIT] option to edit existing PCW screen configurations.
From the PCW Configuration screen (Figure 1 O-3), highlight EDIT and press ENTER. A submenu
of screens is displayed. Highlight the desired screen and press ENTER. The Screen
Configuration screen is displayed (Figure 1 O-l 0). Paragraph 1O-6-6 explains how to edit this
screen and Paragraph 1O-6-7 summarizes each field on the screen.
Figure 1O-l 0. PCW Screen Configuration Screen
August 7,1992 Page W-13

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 10 CONflGURATlON AND CALIBRATION
INITIAL PCW CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6&4g
lCb6-6 How to Edit a PCW Screen COnflgUI’8tlOn

Use the arrow keys or MOUSE to select a field on the Screen Configuration screen. When
selected, a field is either displayed in reverse video or a black box appears to the left of the field
name. An instruction fine explaining how to edit the selected field is displayed at the bottom of
the screen. For example, in Figure 10-10, QUIT is selected and the instruction is to “Press
ENTER to return to device configuration menu”.
How a field is edited depends upon the type of field it is. The PCW Configuration Screen
contains two field types. One type requires you to type in a value using the keyboard. To change
the field value, type in the new value and press ENTER; the new value is displayed. The “Screen
name” field is edited this way.
The second fieM type’provkfes a submenu of available selections. To edit this field type, highlight
the field and then press ENTER; a submenu is displayed. Select the desired submenu item and
press ENTER; the new selection is displayed. The following fields are this type:
l Alpha channel fields (DEPTH to FLOW OUT in Figure 10-10)
l Chart channel fields (ROP FTMOUR and BIT WEIGHT in Figure 10-10)
. Screen type
When all edits are made, press the < Esc > key or highlight QUIT and press ENTER. The PCW
10-6-7 PCW Screen Configuration Fields

The fields on the PCW Screen Configuration screen are summarized below.
Screen Name - contains the name of the screen, up to 13 characters (letters, numbers, blanks).
Alpha Channel Fields - available for the TWO STRIP 5 ALPHA and TWO STRIP 9 ALPHA
screens. Each alpha channel field contains the name of the channel displayed in that
location on the PCW screen.
Chart Channel Flalds - available for all screen types. Each chart channel field contains the
name of the channel whose data values are plotted on vertical strip charts.
Screen type - contains the name of the selected screen type; i.e. TWO STRIP 5 ALPHA, etc.
Page 1 O-l 4 August 7,1992

MID TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION -10
MANUAL 6040 INmAL PCW CONFlGURATlON
104-8 ADD Screens
Use the DEVICE SCREENS: [ADD] option to add new screens to the PCW configuration. A
maximum of 14 screens can be assigned to one PCW. To add screens, follow the steps below:
1. From the PCW CONFIGURATION screen (Figure lo-3), highlight

ADD and press ENTER. Adefautt Screen Configuration is
Figure 1O-l 1. Default PCW Screen Configuration Screen
2. Refer to Paragraphs 1O-6-6 and 1O-6-7 to edit the defautt Screen so

that it describes the desired screen configuration.
3. When complete, press the c Esc > key. The PCW
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3, as needed, to add screens.
August7,1992 Page 1045

M/D TOTCO
INITIAL PCW CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6@4g
10-6-9 DELETE Screens

Use the DEVICE SCREENS: [DELETE] option to delete PCW screen configurations, as follows:
DELETE and press ENTER. A submenu of available screens is
displayed.
2. Highlight the screen to delete and press ENTER. The following

> OPTIONS <
m YES
3. Select NO to keep the screen. Select YES to delete the screen.

The PCW CONFIGURATION screen and DELETE submenu are
displayed.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3, as needed, to delete screen configurations.
5. To exit, press the c Esc > key. the submenu is closed and the PCW
Page W-16 August 7,1992

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION chaptef10
MANUAL -40 INlTlAL PCW CONFIGURATION
lo-7 PLOT CONFlGURATlON
Use this option to configure PCW paper plots and to add/delete plot configurations. Two pbt
types are available for displaying real-time or historical data in time or in depth:
THREE COLUMN PLOT - contains up to nine channels and consists of three strip charts with up
to three channels plotted on each chart (Figure 1O-l 4).
SEVEN COLUMN PLOT - contains up to 14 channels and consists of seven strip charts, with up
to two channels plotted on each chart (Figure 1O-l 5)
Up to three, 3 COLUMN plots and three, 6 COLUMN plots can be assigned to one PCW.
10-7-l EDIT Plot Configurations
Use the DEVICE PLOTS: [EDIT] option to edit existing PCW plot configurations.
From the PCW CONFIGURATION screen (lo-3), highlight EDIT and press ENTER. A submenu
of plots is displayed. Highlight the desired plot and press ENTER. The Plot Configuration screen
is displayed (Figures lo-12 and 10-13).
Each column on the screen represents one column on the plot. On the 7 COLUMN plot screen,
the two top rows of channels represent channels that will be plotted in Plot Columns 1,3,5 and 7,
from left to right. Likewise, the bottom two rows of channels represent channels that will be
plotted in Plot Columns 2, 4 and 6, from left to right. The channels selected for each screen
column are the channels that will be displayed in that column on the plot. Paragraph 10-7-2
explains how to edii this screen and Paragraph 10-7-3 summarizes each field on the screen.
Figure 1 O-l 2. THREE COLUMN Plot Configuration Screen
August 7,1992 Page l&17

M/D TOTCO
: I

INlTlAL PCW CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6040
Figure 1O-13. SEVEN COLUMN Plot Configuration Screen
167-2 How to Edit a PCW Plot Conflguratlon

Use the arrow keys to select a field on the Plot Configuration screen. When selected, a field is
either displayed in reverse video or a black box is displayed to the left of the field name. An
instruction line explaining how to edit the field is displayed at the bottom of the screen. For
example, in Figure 10-12, QUIT is selected and the instruction is “Press ENTER to return to
device configuration menu”.
To edit the “Plot name” field, highlight the field name; then type in the name of the plot (up to 13
characters) and press ENTER.
To edii the channel name fields and “Plot type” field, highlight the field name, then press ENTER.
A submenu is displayed. Select the desired submenu item and press ENTER; the new selection
is displayed.
lib7-3 Plot Conflgumtlon Screen Fields

The fields on the PCW Plot Configuration screen are summarized below.
Plot name - the name of the plot, up to 13 characters.
Channel name - the name of the channel that will be displayed in the corresponding pbt column
Plot type - the type of plot, 3 COLUMN or 7 COLUMN
Page l&l8 August 7,1992

M ID TOTCO
chapter 10
MANUAL 60-40 INITIAL PCW CONflGURATlON
Figure 1 O-14. THREE COLUMN PCW Plot

M/D TOTCO
INITIAL PCW CONFIGURATION MANUAL 90-40
Figure 10-15. SEVEN COLUMN PCW Plot
Page lW0 August 7,1992

MIDTOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION ChqmlO
MANUAL 6&40 INlTlAL PCW CONFIGURATION
10-7-4 ADD Plots
Use the DEVICE PLOTS: [ADD] option to add new plots to the PCW configuration. A maximum
of three, 3 COLUMN plots and three, 6 COLUMN plots is allowed. Follow the steps bebw to add
plots:
ADD and press ENTER. A default Plot Configuration screen is
displayed (Figure 1O-l 2).
2. Refer to Paragraphs 1O-7-2 and 1O-7-3 to edft the default screen so

that it describes the new plot configuration.
3. When complete, press the < Esc > key or highlight QUIT and press
ENTER. The PCW CONFIGURATION screen is displayed.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3, as needed, to add plots.
l&7-5 DELETE Plats
Use the DEVICE PLOTS: [DELETE] option to delete PCW plot configurations, as follows:
DELETE and press ENTER. A submenu of available plots is
displayed.
2. Highlight the plot to delete and press ENTER. The following
3. Select NO to keep the pbt. Select YES to delete the plot. The
PCW CONFIGURATION screen and DELETE submenu are
displayed.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3, as needed, to delete plot configurations.
5. To exit, press the c Esc > key. the submenu is closed and the PCW
August 7,1992 Pago l&21

M/D TOTCO
INITIAL PCW CONFIGURATION MANUAL 60-40
lo-8 EXITING PCW CONFlGURATlON

To exit PCW Configuration, press the < Esc > key or highlight QUIT from the PCW Configuration
screen and press ENTER. The PCW Device Screen (Figure 1 O-2) is displayed. To add or edii
another PCW, make the appropriate selection. To exit, press the <Esc > key or highlight QUIT
and press ENTER. The following message is displayed:
> DAQ ACCESS <
> ATTENTION c

TO THE DAQ?
> OPTIONS <
m ABORT
Select SEND to send the new cdnfiguratidn to the DAQ and overwrite the configuration stored
Note, however, that if ABORT is selscted, any subsequent operations, such as re-entering PCW
memory.
Page lfI=22 August 7,1992

MID TOTCO
CHAPTER ELEVEN
INITIAL DSI CONFIGURATION
1 l-l INTRODUCTION
The DSI (DAQ/SPECTRUM 1000 Interface) converts data from the System DAQ into a format
that a SPECTRUM or SPECTRUM-type display panel (i.e. Mud Watch) can read and forwards
the data to the display. The DSI also converts function codes entered from the display panel
keypad into a format that the TOTAL system can read and forwards the data to the System DAQ.
DSI channel and function configurations are dictated by the display panel design and differ from
rig to rig. This chapter provides general instructions for initial DSI configuration of any
SPECTRUM-type display panel, which consists of:
. adding DSl’s to and deleting DSl’s from the system
. DSI channel configuration
. DSI function configuration
Figure 11-l outlines the general procedure for initial DSI configuration of a new system. For
1 l-2 PRE-ASSIGNED DSI CHANNELS

The DAQ logical channel numbers and channel names listed in Table 11-l are pre-assigned in
the DSI. No other channels should be assigned to these logical channel numbers, regardless of
whether or not the pre-assigned channel is part of the system. For example, if PIT VOL 12 is not
used, logical channel number 053 must remain unconfigured, with no channel assigned to it.
CAUTION
The logical channels listed in Table 1 l-l are pre-assigned in the DSI and
should not be changed. Assigning any other channel to the logical channel
numbers in this table can result in DSI malfunction.
Table 1 l-l. Pwisslgned DSI Channels
I DAQ Logical
Channel I PreAssIgned Channel
I
DAQ LogIcal
Channel I
Pwisslgned Channel
005 DEPTH 227 SPM TRIGGER
029 TOTAL SPM 228 AUTO ROP

042 - 053 PIT VOLUME 1 - PIT VOL 12 229 RIG MODE
042 - 049 RES VOL 1 - RES VOL 8 230 DRILL/TRIP
055 RETURN FLOW 235-238 PIT VOL 13 - PIT VOL 16
I 062 - 063 1 TRIP TANK 1 -TRIP TANK 2 1 250 I DSI POLLING
I ~~ 218 I ROP I
Match 19,1993 Page 11-l

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL DSI CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6040
I
Add DSl’s to or Delete DSl’s from
the system
(Paragraph 11-7)
I
Configure Device Channels
(Paragraph 11-10)
Confl ure Device Functions

($aragraph 11-11)
Exitto
TMggj or
Conflguratkn
<3>
Figure 1 l-l. DSI Configuration Procedure
Page 1 l-2 March 19,1993

MID TOTCO
MANUAL 604 INlTlAL DSI CONFIGURATION
1 l-3 SPECTRUM-TYPE PANEL DISPLAYS
Data can be presented in three ways on a SPECTRUM-type display panel:

. Numerically - Up to six digits can be displayed for each channel.
. Bar graphs - Bar graphs display data ranging from 0 to 125% of the user-specified
high alarm limit. For example, in Figure 11-2, the user-specified high alarm limit is
200 and the high bar scale value is 125% of 200, or 250. The high alarm limit value
is entered in the “High limit” field of the DSI Device Channel Configuration screen
(Figure 116).
. Meters - Meters (also referred to as circular bar graphs) display data ra ing from
0, or some channel-specific value, to the user-specified high scale value9 Figure
11-2). The high scale value is entered in the “High scale” field of the DSI Device
Channel Configuration screen (Figure 11-6).
I c ‘t
n 250
200
USer-SpWifiSd
I
High Alarm
Limit
Meter
Figure 11-2. Bar Graphs and Meters: SPECTRUM-Type Displays
March 19,1993 Page 11-3

M/D TOTCO
1 l-4 SPECTRUM CHANNEL CONFlGURATlONS

For each channel, all TOTAL devices (DSI, VXC, etc.) use the logical channel number specified in
the DAQ. However, SPECTRUM-type display panels require a different set of logical channel
numbers for the channel value, high alarm limit, low alarm limit and high scale in order to direct
these values to the correct display panel location.
This is illustrated by comparing the VXC DEPTH channel configuration in Figure 9-6 with the DSI
RETURN FLOW channel configuration in Figure 11-6. Note that the DSI channel configuration
has a unique channel number assigned to the Main SPECTRUM channel (channel value),
SPECTRUM bw limit (low alarm limit), SPECTRUM high limit (high alarm limit) and SPECTRUM
scale (high scale).
For a complete list of SPECTRUM logical channel numbers, refer to the SPECTRUM channel
configuration master list provided with each system (Figure 11-l 0).
1 l-5 SPECTRUM FUNCTION CODES

A function code is a one- or twodigk code used to modiiy channel parameters, such as high or
bw alarm limits. Function codes are etched on SPECTRUM-type display panels and entered by
the operator via the keypad. As Figure 11-6 shows, function code configurations consist of two
types of information:
. Functlon type - identifies the action, or function type, such as enable/disable
channel.
. Related channels - identifies the DAQ channel(s) for the function to use; namely,
Base channel, Second channel and Highlighted channel.
The function code displayed on the Function Configuration screen (Figure 11-8) corresponds to
the function code on the display panel. For example, Function Code 01 on the Function
Configuration screen corresponds to function “01 on the display panel.
q
1 l-6 DSI DEVICE ID’s

The Configuration and Calibration software assigns each DSI a permanent number, called a
device ID. The ID of the first, or only, DSI is 0 (DSI # 0) and additional DSls are assigned ID
numbers beginning with 1 (DSI # 1, DSI # 2). The device ID is not affected by subsequent
addition or deletion of other DSls. For example, if DSI ##Ois deleted from a system containing two
DSls, the remaining DSI will still be DSI #l .
NOTE
The device ID must also be set at the DSI. Refer to Manual 60-50 for
instructions on setting the device ID at the DSI.
Page 114 March 19,1999

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Cha@er 11
MANUAL 6&40 INITIAL DSI CONFlGUFiATlON
A TOTAL system can contain up to 10 devices, including the System DAQ. Follow the steps
below to add DSl to the system or delete them from the system.
1. From the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu (Figure 4-2)

highlight “ and press ENTER. The submenu
2. Highlight SPECTRUM INTERFACE and press ENTER. The default

DSI device screen (Figure 11-3) is displayed, indicating that the
system contains one DSI (UNIT 0), with a device ID of 0.
[UNIT 0]
[DELETE]
Figure 11-3. Default DSI Device Screen
3. To add a DSI, highlight ADD and press ENTER. The DSI is added
to the system and [UNIT l] is displayed on the DSI device screen.
To delete a DSI, highlight DELETE below the I.D. of the device to
delete and press ENTER. The following message is displayed:
March 19,1993 Page 11-5

M/D TOTCO
jli oPTloNS <VEi==jl
Select YES to delete the selected DSI.

4. Repeat Step 3, as needed; then proceed to Paragraph 11-9 to
configure the DSl(s).
11-9 DSI CONFIGURATION MASTER LISTS

Each DSI is accompanied by three master lists which describe the display panel configuration.
Use these master lists in conjunction with the information in this chapter to configure the DSI.
The three master lists are identified below. Examples of each list are presented at the end of this
chapter in Figures 11-9 through 11-l 1.
. DAQ Conflguratlon - used to configure DAQ channels
l SPECTRUM Channel Configuration - used to configure DSI channels
l SPECTRUM Function Codes - used to configure DSI function codes.
Page 11-9 March 19,1993

MID TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION ch8pter11
MANUAL 6040 INITIAL DSI CONFlGURATlON
11-9 THE DSI CONFIGURATION SCREEN
To begin DSI configuration, highlight UNIT 0 from the DSI device screen and then press ENTER.
The DSI Configuration screen (Figure 114) is displayed and the following options are available:
l create a channel list for the DSI using the DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] and
[DELETE] options.
l edit channel configurations using the DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT] and/or
[ADD + EDlTj options.
l add or delete functions from the configuration using the DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [ADD]
and [DELETE] options.
edit function configurations using the DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [EDITJ and/or
l [ADD+ EDlTj options.
save DSI conf’ uratbns to floppy or load them from floppy using the FLOPPY:
’ [SAVE] and [L 8 AD] options, respectively (see Chapter 5).
DEVICE CHANNELS:
DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [ADD] [EDlTJ [ADD + EDIT] [DELETE]
FLOPPY: [ADD] [EDITJ [ADD + EDITI [DELETE]
[SAVE] [LOAD]
mm
Press enter to quit and return tothe main menu

INtTlAL DSI CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6040
1 l-10 DEVICE CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

Use the DEVICE CHANNELS options to create a DSI channel list and configure each DSI
channel. The DSI channel list should contain all DAQ channels for which the display panel is
expecting data. As Figure 11-6 shows, a channel configuration describes the:
. name and logical channel number of the SPECTRUM channel that corresponds to
the selected DAQ channel
. name and logical channel number of the SPECTRUM channel that contains the bw
alarm limit for the selected DAQ channel
. name and logical channel number of the SPECTRUM channel that contains the high
alarm limit for the selected DAQ channel
. name and logical channel number of the SPECTRUM channel that contains the full
scale value for the selected DAQ channel
. name of the DAQ channel whose value is used by that SPECTRUM channel
NOTE
The channel name displayed to the right of a SPECTRUM channel number

on the DeviceChannel Configuration screen might not bethe actualchannel
name. ALWAYS IDENTIFY SPECTRUM CHANNELS BY LOGICAL
CHANNEL NUMBER - NOT BY CHANNEL NAME.
ll-10-l ADD Channels

DSI channel configuration differs from channel configuration of all other TOTAL devices in that
there is no DSI master file and, consequently, no default channel list. Thus, the DSI channel list
must be created by adding each channel, individually, to the channel configuration. Use DEVICE
CHANNELS: [ADD] to create the DSI channel list, as described below.
1. From the DSI CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 11-t) highlight

DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] and press ENTER. A submenu of
available DAQ channels is displayed (Figure 11-5).
is added to the configuration and removed from the submenu.
3. Repeat Step 2, as needed, to create a list of all DAQ channels to be

used by the display panel. Then proceed to Paragraph 11-l O-3.
1 l-10-2 DELETE Channels

Use DEVICE CHANNELS: [DELETE] to delete DAQ channels from the DSI channel list:
1. From the DSI CONFlGURATlON screen (Figure 11-4), highlight

DEVICE CHANNELS: [DELETE] and press ENTER. A DAQ
channel submenu is displayed.
2. Highlight the DAQ channel to delete and then press ENTER. The
channel is removed from the channel configuration.
3. Repeat Step 2, as needed, to delete DAQ channels from the DSI

configuration; then press the <Esc> key.
Page 11-9 March 19,1993

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6040 INITIAL DSI CONFIGURATION
III DEVICE CHANNELS:
DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [ADD]
...... .............) .~
~~:~
#gJf&g ,j ::. ;; Gx.L.&
:l:~:j::~:i:I:::i:I:I:~~~~~~.~:::~.~::::::::::::::~::::::::~~
Figure 1 l-5. DSI DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] Submenu
Figure 1 l-6. DSI Device Channel Configuration Screen
March 19,1993 Page 11-9

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 11 CONFIGURATION AND CALiBRATiON
INITIAL DSI CONFIGURATION MANUAL 904
1 l-10-3 EDIT DSVIW Channel ConfIguratIOn

Use DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT] to describe or edit DSI channel configurations as shown below.
Refer to Paragraph 11-l O-3-1 for a description of each field on the Device Channel Configuration
screen.
1. From the DSI CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 11-4), highlight

DEVICE CHANNELS: [EDIT] and then press ENTER. The DAQ
channel submenu is displayed (Figure 11-5).
2. Highlight the channel to edit and press ENTER. The DSI Channel
Configuration screen for that channel is displayed (Figure 11-6).
The DAQ channel name and units are displayed above the
SPECTRUM channel fields (for example, “RETURN FLOW %” in
Figure 11-6).
3a. To edit any of the first five fields (Main SPECTRUM channel -
Attribute channel), use the arrow keys to highlight the field name
and then press ENTER. A submenu is displayed. Use the arrow
keys to highlight the desired submenu item and press ENTER. The
new selection is displayed.
3b. To edit the Low limit, High limit and High scale fietds, use the arrow
keys to highlight the field name, then key-in the value and press
ENTER.
4. When all fields are edited, press c Esc >. The DAQ channel
submenu in Step 1 is displayed.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 until all DSI channels are configured.

Then press c Esc > from the DAQ channel submenu. The DSI
11-10-3-l Device Channel Conflguratlon Screen Flekis

The fietds on the DSI Device Channel Configuration screen are summarized below.
Maln Spectrum channel - the logical channel number and name of the SPECTRUM channel
that corresponds to the selected DAQ channel.
Spectrum low limit channel - the logical channel number and name of the SPECTRUM
channel containing the bw alarm limit for the selected DAQ channel.
Spectrum hlgh limit channel - the logical channel number of the SPECTRUM channel
containing the high alarm limit for the selected DAQ channel. The high alarm limit is
displayed on bar graphs (Figure 11-2).
Spectrum scale channel - the logical channel number and name of the SPECTRUM channel
containing the high scale value (Figure 11-2) for meter displays of the selected DAQ
channel.
Attribute channel -the logical channel number and name of the DAQ channel whose value is
used for the associated SPECTRUM channel status. The attribute channel is used to turn
display panel indiiors on and off; for example, an attribute channel is used to select high
or low gear for top drive or rotary tables.
On/Off control channel - Not implemented.
Page 11-10 March 19,1993

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATlON Chapter 11
MANUAL 6040 INITIAL DSI CONFlGURATlON
Low llmlt - the value of the bw alarm limit for the seleded DAQ channel. The “Low limit” field is
only displayed when a “Spectrum bw limit channel” is specified.
Hlgh llmlt - the value of the high alarm limit for the selected DAQ channel. The “High limit” field
is only displayed when a “Spectrum high limit channel” is specified.
Hlgh scale - the high scale value (Figure 11-2) for meter displays of the selected DAQ channel.
This value defines the range of the meter. The “High scale” field is only displayed when a
“Spectrum scale channel” is specified.
1 l-10-4 ADD + EDIT Channels
Use DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD + EDITJ to add a channel to the channel configuration and then
edit the channel configuration as follows:
Channel Configuration screen is displayed.

5. When all required channels have been added/edited, press c Esc >
from the [ADD + EDlTj submenu. The DSI CONFIGURATION
11-l 1 DEVICE-FUNCTION CONFlGURATlON
Use DEVICE FUNCTIONS to:

l create a list of DSI function codes using DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [ADD] and [DELETE]
. describe and edit DSI function codes using DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [EDIT] and
[ADD + EDIT].
Function codes enable the operator to modify channel parameters via the.display panel keypad
(Paragraph 11-5). As Figure 11-8 shows, function codes contain two types of information:
. Function type - identifies an action, or function type; such as setting alarm limits
. Redated channels - identifies the DAQ channel(s) required to perform the fundion.
Depending upon the function type, related channel(s) might be Base channel,
Second channel and/or Highlighted channel (Paragraph 11-11-3-l).
The function code displayed on the Function Configuration screen (Figure 11-8) is the same as
that etched on the display panel. Thus, Function Code 01 on the Function Configuration screen
corresponds exactly to function “01” on the display panel.
The following paragraphs contain general information on DSI device function configuration that
can be used for any SPECTRUM-type display panel. To configure the DSI functions for each rlg,
refer to that rig’s system master list.
March 19,1993 Page 11-11

NUD TOTCO
INITIAL DSI CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6@4g
1 l-l l-l ADD Device Functions

Use DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [ADD] to add function codes to the DSI configuration, as follows:
1. From the DSI CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 11-4) highlight

DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [ADD] and press ENTER. A submenu of
function codes is displayed (Figure 11-7).
2. Highlight the function code to add and then press ENTER. The
code is added to the configuration and removed from the submenu.
3. Repeat Step 2, as needed, to add function codes; then press <Esc>
and proceed to Paragraph 11-l l-3.
11-11-2 DELETE Device Functions

Use DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [DELETE] to delete function codes from the DSI configuration, as
follows:

DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [DELETE] and press ENTER. A submenu of
function codes is displayed.
2. Highlight the code to delete and then press ENTER. The code is
removed from the DSI configuration and from the submenu.
3. Repeat Step 2, as needed, to delete function codes; then press

<Esc> .
DEVICE CHANNELS:
DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [ADD] [EDlTJ [ADD + EDlTj [DELETE1
Figure 11-7. DSI DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [ADD] Submenu
Page 11-12 March 19,1993

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 80-40 INlTlAL DSI CONflGURATlON
1 l-l 1-3 EDIT Device Functions
Use DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [EDIT) to configure or edit function codes as described below. Refer
to Paragraph 11-l 1-3-l for a description of each field on the Device Function Configuration
screen.
1. From the DSI CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 11-4) highlight
EDIT and press ENTER. A submenu of function codes is displayed.
2. Highlight the function code to edit and press ENTER. The Device
Function Configuration screen for that function code is displayed
(Figure 11-8).
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the name of the field to edit and
press ENTER; a submenu is displayed.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired submenu ftem and press
ENTER. The new selection is displayed.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4, as needed, to edit each field. When all fields
have been edited, press < Esc >. The function code submenu is
displayed.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5, as needed, until all DSI function codes
are configured. Then press e Esc > from the function code
submenu. The DSI CONFIGURATION screen is displayed.
Function number 01
Function type: ENABLE/DISABLE CHANNEL(S)
I II Base channel : None Ill
Figure 1 l-8. DSI Device Function Configuration Screen
March 19,1993 Page 11-13

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL DSI CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6&4g
11-11-3-l Device Function Configuration Screen Fields

The four fields on the Device Function Configuration screen are summarized below.
Function type - the type of function to perform. Table 11-2 describes each function type and its
operation and requirements.
Base channel - For most function types, the base channel is the DAQ channel that will be
affected by the selected function (Table 11-2).
Second channel - Typically, the second channel is an additional DAQ channel that will be
affected by the selected function (Table 11-2).
Highlighted channel - The highlighted channel is a DAQ channel whose data value flashes on
the display panel when the operator enters the associated function code. This enables the
operator to confirm that the correct function code was entered. In most cases, the
highlighted channel is the same as the base channel (Table 11-2).
11-11-3-2 Function Types

Table 11-2 describes all function types and explains how to use them. A more thorough
description of each function type is presented in Appendix E.
Table 11-2. DSI Function Types
Function Type Descrlptlon Operatlon/Requlfements
ENABLUDISABLE Changes a channel’s “active” flag. Set both Base Channel and
CHANNEL(S) Inactive channels are not used to Highlighted Channel to the affected
compute derived channel values. DAQ channel.
CHANGE RIG MODE Changes the system mode from Drill Set Base Channel to DAQ channel
to Trip, Trip to Standby or Standby to # 229 (RIG MODE).
Drill.
CHANGE GEARS Changes the gear value used to

calculate torque for a two-gear top
drive or rotary table torque channel
when gears are manually shifted.
a. If there is only one system (top a. Set both Base Channel and
drive or rotary table) and it has two Second Channel to either
gears. TO GEAR or RT GEAR, depending
on the system.
b. If there are 2, two-gear systems b. Set Base Channel to TD/RT

(top drive and rotary table)and the SELECT, set Second Channel to
display panel contains a PIPE TD GEAR and set Highlighted
TORQUE field for displaying Channel to RT GEAR.
either TOP DRIVE or ROTARY
TABLE channel data.
NOTE: See SELECT DRILlJTRIP
if one system has one gear and one
system has two gears.
(Continued)
Page 11-14 March 19,1993

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6&40 INITIAL DSI CONFlGURATlON
Table 11-2. DSI Functlon Types (Continued)
Functlon Types Descriptkn Operatlon/Requlrements
CHANGE FIELDS Changes the field used to calculate Set Base Channel to Field Select
torque for a TOP DRIVE or ROTARY channel (TD FIELD or RT FIELD).
TABLE channel that has three The field select channel must be a
selectable excitation fields. Manual Value channel.
SELECT ONE OF TWO Changes the channel displayed Set Base Channel to one channel,
CHANNELS when two channels share a display set Second Channel to other channel
field. and set Highlighted Channel to field
channel name on panel. Example:
Base Channel = CASING
PRESSURE 1, Seoond Channel =
CASING PRESSURE 2, Highlighted
Channel = CASING PRESSURE.
DISABLE/ZERO Turns counters off and on. Set both Base Channel and
CHANNEL Automatically zeroes the channel Highlighted Channel to affected DAQ
when turned on. channel.
ZERO CHANNEL Zeroes a channel value. Set both Base Channel anti
VALUE Highlighted Channel to affected DAQ
channel.
SELECT DRILUTRIP a. Changes the system mode from a. Set Base Channel to DAQ channel
Drill to Trip Out, from Trip Out to # 230 (DRILUTRIP).
Trip In or from Trip In to Drill.
b. When TOP DRIVE and ROTARY b. Set Base Channel to TD/RT

TABLE share a display field SELECT.
and only one of the two systems
has two gears, this function is used
to change from the single-gear
system to the high gear of the
two-gear system, then from high
gear to bw gear, and then from bw
gear to the single-gear system.
SELECT TD/RT When TOP DRIVE and ROTARY Set Base Channel to TD/RT
TABLE share a display field and both SELECT, set Second Channel to TD
are two-gear systems, this function GEAR and set Highlighted Channel
type changes the displayed channel to RT GEAR.
from TOP DRIVE to ROTARY
TABLE, or vice versa.
NOTE: See SELECT DRILL/TRIP if
only one system has two gears.
SET CHANNEL HIGH Changes a channels high limftvalue Set both Base Channel and
LIMIT to an operator-entered value. Hlghlllhted Channel to affected DAQ
channel.
(Continued)
March 19,1993 Page 11-15

MiD TOT&
Table 11-2. DSI Function Types (Contlnued)
Function m Description Dpwatlon/Requlremer
SET CHANNEL LOW Changes a channel’s low limit value Set both Base Channel and
LIMIT (POSITIVE to an operator-entered value, Highlighted Channel to affect
VALUE ONLY) provided the bw limit will always be channel.
a positive number.
SET CHANNEL LOW Changes a channel’s low limtt value Set both Base Channel and
LIMIT (NEGATIVE to an operator-entered value, Highlighted Channel to affects
VALUE ONLY) provided the bw limit will always he channel.
a negative number.
SET CHANNEL VALUE Changes a channel’s current value to Set both Base Channel and
an operator-entered value. Highlighted Channel to affect
channel.
START ROP Changes the displayed ROP value

from “0” to a numerical value, or vice
versa. When the ROP channel is
active (Paragraph 7-3-l 0), an ROP
value is displayed. When the ROP
channel is not active, “0” is displayed.
a. If the system contains either a. Set Base channel to either

ROP FT/HR or ROP MIlVFf. ROP FT/HR or ROP MIN/F
Highlighted channel to DA{
channel # 218 (ROP).
b. If the system contains both b. Set Base channel to ROP I

ROP FT/HR and ROP MIN/FT and Set Second channel to
they share a display field. ROP MIN/FT. Set High&h
channel to DAQ channel #
(ROP).
SET ACTIVE PIT Activates or deactivates mud pits for Set both Base Channel and
ON/OFF MUD VOLUME and GAIN/LOSS Highlighted Channel to MUD
channel cabulatbns. Deactivated VOLUME. Set Second Chart1
channels are not used to calculate GAIN/LOSS.
MUD VOLUME or GAIN/LOSS.
SET RESERVE PIT Actiiates or deactivates mud pits for Set both Base Channel and
ON/OFF TOTAL RESERVE VOLUME Highlighted Channel to TOTA
channel calculations. Deactivated RESERVE VOLUME channel
channels are not used to calculate
total reserve volume.
SET TRIP TANK Activates or deactivates trip tanks for Set both Base Channel and
ON/OFF TOTAL TRIP VOLUME channel Highlighted Channel to TOTA
calwlatbns. Deactivated channels VOLUME channel.
are not used to calculate total trip
volume.
(Continued)
Page 11-16 Mamh 19,1993

M/D TOTCO
CONflGURATlON AND CALIBRATION -11
MANUAL W-40 INRIAL DSI CONFIGURATION
Table 11-2. DSI Function Typ68 (Continued)
Function Type Descrlptlon OperatioWRequlmnen
SEL ACTIVE VOLUME Displays a selected active mud pit in Set Base Channel to TANK
the TANK VOLUME channel display VOLUME and set Highlighted
field. Channel to TANK NUMBER channel.
SEL TRIP VOLUME Displays a selected trip tank in the Set Base Channel to TANK
TANK VOLUME Channel display VOLUME channel and set
field. Highliihted Channel to TANK
NUMBER channel.
SET LINES STRUNG Sets the number of lines strung. Set both Base Channel and
Highlfghted Channel to LINES
STRUNG. LINES STRUNG must be
a Manual Value channel.
SET TIME Sets the time. Leave all entries blank.
SET DATE Sets the date. Leave all entries blank.
SET METER FULL Changes the Full Scale value on Set both Base Channel and
SCALE VALUE meter displays. Highlighted Channel to affected DAQ
channel.
BACKLIGHTING Turns display panel backlighting on Leave all entries blank.

ON/OFF and off.
ACK DEPTH ALARM Stops the DEPTH channel value Leave all entries blank.
from flashing and stops the alan
horn from sounding when a depth
setpoint is passed.
11-l l-4 ADD + EDIT Devke Functions
Use DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [ADD + EDlTj to add a function to the device configuration and then
edii the function configuration as follows:
1. From the DSI CONFIGURATION screen (Figure 114), hghlight

DEVICE FUNCTIONS: [ADD + EDrr] and press ENTER. A
submenu of function codes is displayed (F$ure 11-7).
2. Highlight the function code to add and then press ENTER. The
Device Function Configuration screen is displayed for editing.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3, as needed, to add and edit functions. Then

press the < Esc > key from the [ADD + EDIT] submenu. The DSI
CONFlGURATlON screen is displayed.
March 19,1993 Page 11-17

MID TOTCO
Chapter 11 CONFlGURATlON AND CALlBRATlON
1 l-l 2 EXlTlNG DSI CONFIGURATION

To exit DSI Configuration, press the < Esc > key or highlight QUIT from the DSI
CONFIGURATION screen and press ENTER. The DSI Device Screen (Figure 113) is displayed.
To add or edit another DSI, make the appropriate selection. To exit, press the <Es&> key br -
m > DAQ ACCESS <
> ATTENTION <

TO THE DAQ?
> OPTIONS <

m ABORT
Select SEND to send the new configuration to the DAQ and overwrite the previous configuration.
Messages are displayed as pertinent configurations are sent to the DAQ.
Page 11-18 March 19,1993

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Ctlmterll
w-~~
MANUAL 604 INITIAL DSI CONFIGURATION
sysmm DA0 conilg~uon for xXxXx

Da* MN-OPVY
DA0 CtunM Name Input Algorithm

clut TYP Conn value
1 Hook Load CUrrent 1 !3tandard A/g Fatest -
3 ROP FT/HR slow Rate 1 Rap-FtRlr Fastest - En
5 DepthofHde Event 1 Fastest M z
11 Pipe Toqw (Ft-lbs) Current 2 RotTblK-lbs Faswt -
12 Pipe RPM Current 10 stdPositiw Fastest -
16 Air Pressure 3 StdPOSitiW Fastest -
56 Air volume In Current 4 std Positive Fastest -
57 Air Volume Gut CUrrent 5 std Positive Fasaest -
58 Air Temperature In Current 6 --Ml slowest -
59 Air Temperature Gut ClUtWlt 7 -tiNI slowest -
60 Vawum Cunent 8 standard Alg Fastest -
66 BarometJio PIBssure Cunent 9 std Positive slowest -
91 Time Derived lirnngd slowest M
92 Data Slowest M
%i?d
197 Pipe Torque (In-b) Rot Tbl In-lbs Fasbest -
200 Rot Table Gear Manual Faswst M 4 4=HiGear
2=LoGear
201 ROP MINET 1 RopMiit Fastest - -En
216 ROP SelectROP Faswst - -En

231 RTHiGrRatio Manual slowest - 4.371
232 RtLoGrRatio Manual sbwest - 1.m
260 Channel 260 Mmlual slowest - 2
253 xxxxx.dln Mmual sbmst - 0 Not Used
Flgum 114. Sample: System DAQ Channel ConfIguratIon Mastew List
Explanation:
Input Can = Input awnacbr =thenumberof~DAOtWdlerminationboardinputwnnecw med1Doonneotthesensor.
Y 31Opera&f can modfy channel (Paragraph 73-10). All dwnne~ without Capability M cannot be modified.
z= operatorcanzerochannel(Paragraph73-10). Ancllanrwwithoutcapabilityzcannotbezeroed.
En = Operator can activate/deauiva~ channel (Paragraph 7-3-10). Channel is initially active. The ‘act&e status of atl channeb
witttoutCapabWyEncannotbechangedbytheoperamr. ’
-En = Operator can activate/dea&ate channel (Paragraph 7-3-10). Channel is initially deauivamd. The ‘a&W status of all
channetswithoutCap&iMy-ENcannotbechangedhytheopemtor.
Output Conn = Output connectw = the number of tie digital output conwctor on the DAQ field Orminadion board used to send a
driviig signal from the ohanfd to another insuument
March 19,1993 Page 11-19

M/D TOTCO
INlTlAL DSI CONflGURATlON MANUAL 6WO
SPECTRUM Channel Conflguratlon for XXXXX

Date: MWDD-YY
DAQ Main LOW Hlgh Hlgh Attrtb

Channel Name
Chl # Channel Llmtt Limit Scale Channel
1 Hook Load 146 __ 79 78

3 ROP FT/HR 137 -e _- --
5 Depth of Hole 136 _- -- we
11 Pipe Torque (Ft-Ltx) 36 77 76 --
12 Pipe RPM 35 __ 75 --
16 Air Pressure 26 93 92 me
56 Air Volume In 29 97 96 __
57 Air Volume Out 30 99 98 me
58 Air Temperature In 27 -- __ --
59 Air Temperature Out 28 -- _- --
60 Vacuum 32 -- _- --
68 Barometric Pressure 33 -- -- --
201 ROP MIN/FT 142 -- -- me
216 ROP 114 143 145 _-
Flgure 11-10. Sample: SPECTRUM Channel Conflguratlon Master Llst
NOTE
The Main Channel, Low Limit, High Limit and High Scale columns show
SPECTRUM logical channel numbers. The names of these SPECTRUM
logical channels may not be the same as the DAQ channel names. Always
use the SPECTRUM logical channel number during confiiration.
NOTE
The Attribute Channel is a selected DAQ channel.
Page 1 l-20 March 19,1993

IUD TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Chq#ewll
MANUAL 664g INfTfAL DSI CONFIGURATION
SPECTRUM Function Cod08 for XXXXX

Date: MMDPYY
Function
Dascriptlon
Function saw Socond Hlghltghtod
code TYP Channel Channel Channel
11 Set Hook Load Hi Set High Limit Hook Load -- Hook Load
12 Set Hook Load F/S Set Meter Scale Hook Load -- Hook Load
21 Set Air Pressure Hi Set High Limit Air Pressure -- Air Pressure
22 Set Air Pressure Lo Set Low Limit Pos Air Pressure -- Air Pressure
23 Set Air Volume In Hi Set High Limit Air Volume In -- Air Volume In
24 Set Air Volume In Lo Set Low Limit Pos Air Volume In me Air Volume In
25 Set Air Volume Out Hi Set High Limit Air Volume Out -- Air Votume
out
26 Set Air Volume Out Lo Set Low Limit Pos Air Volume Out -- Air Volume
out
27 Select ROP Select 1 of 2 ROP PT/HR ROP ROP
MIIVFT
28 Set ROP Hi Set High Limit ROP -- ROP
29 set ROP Lo Set Low Limit Pos ROP -w ROP
31 Preset Depth Preset Value Depth -- DepQh
32 Sat Pipe Torque Hi Set High Limit Pipe Torque -- Pipe Torque
33 Set Pipe Torque Lo Set Low Limit Pos Pii Torque -- Pipe Torque
34 Set Pipe RPM Hi Set High Limit Pipe RPM -- pipe RPM
35 Set Hi/Lo Gear Change Gear RT Gear RT Gear
97 Backliihting on/off Backlight on/off -- _-
98 Set Date Set Date --
99 set Time Set Time -- --
Figure 1 l-l 1. Sample: SPECTRUM Functlon Code Master List
March l&1993 P0ge 11-21

MID TOTCO
Page 11-22 March 19,1993

M/D TOTCO
CHAPTER TWELVE
CALIBRATION
12-l INTRODUCTION
Use this function to calibrate the sensor channel for each sensor. The calibration procedure
depends upon whether the sensor is analog, digital or EDMS. EDMS calibration will be included
in the next release of this manual.
12-2 THE CALIBRATION MENU
From the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu (Figure 4-2) highlight CALIBRATION and
press ENTER. The SYSTEM CALIBRATION SOFTWARE screen is displayed (Figure 12-1).
[CHANNELS] [ EDMS]
Press enter to quit calibration and return to the main menu
Figure 12-l. SYSTEM CALIBRATION SOFlWARE Screen
To calibrate any sensor other than an EDMS sensor, highlight CHANNELS and press ENTER. A
submenu of default system channels is displayed. Highlight the channel to calibrate and press
ENTER. If an analog channel is selected, the Analog SYSTEM CHANNEL CALIBRATION screen
is displayed (Figure 12-2). If a digital channel is selected, the Digital SYSTEM CHANNEL
CALIBRATION screen is displayed (Figure 12-7).

M/D TOTCO
#
CALIBRATION MANUAL 6Q90
12-3 ANALOG CHANNEL CALIBRATION

Analog sensor output is continuous and proportional to the quantity being measured. The sensor
must be calibrated so that the relationship between sensor output and data values in engineering
units is accurately defined. This is accomplished by identifying the four values listed below:
. Raw Mlnlmum - the raw value when the sensor is set to its minimum
. Value Mlnlmum - the engineering units value corresponding to the raw minimum
l Raw Maximum - the raw value when the sensor is set to maximum output
. Value Maximum - the engineering units value corresponding to the raw maximum
In the analog calibration procedure presented here, Raw Minimum is determined first, then Value
Minimum, then Raw Maximum, then Value Maximum; however, these values may be determined
in any order.
NOTE:
The calibration procedure presented here uses the sensors.
Follow the steps below to calibrate analog channels.

1. Ensure that the sensors are properly connected to the DAQ.
2. Select the analog channel to calibrate as described in Paragraph

12-2. The Analog SYSTEM CHANNEL CALIBRATION screen is
Figure 12-2. Analog Calibration Screen

MiDTOTCO
1
,.i .y, -.

MANUAL 6040 CALlBRATlON
If the channel was previously calibrated, the minimum and

maximum values from that calibration are displayed on the lines
labeled CALIBRATION MIN and CALIBRATION MAX. If the
channel was not previously calibrated, default minimum and
maximum values are listed.
The current sensor reading in raw counts and in engineering units is
presented on the line labeled CURRENT READING. The
CALIBRATION MIN and CALIBRATION MAX values are used to
calculate the current sensor reading in engineering units.
3. Calibrate the raw minimum by setting the sensor to its zero point
and viewing the raw counts displayed next to CURRENT READING.
4. When the reading stabilizes, or you have a good estimate of what
the minimum reading should be, record the raw sensor minimum by
highlighting RAW MIN and pressing ENTER. The Raw Minimum
Calibration screen is displayed (Figure 12-3).
The NEW RAW MINIMUM VALUE field lists the sensor output, in
raw counts, when RAW MIN was selected, in Step 4. The
CURRENT RAW MINIMUM VALUE field lists either raw counts from
the previous calibration or the defautt minimum raw counts.
Figure 12-3. Raw Minirmm Calibration Screen

M/D TOTCO
CALIBRATION MANUAL W4
5. To accept the NEW RAW MINIMUM VALUE, press ENTER.

To enter a different NEW RAW MINIMUM VALUE, type in the value,
up to 6 numbers, and press ENTER. The following messages are
displayed:
NOTICE:

REQUESTING CALIBRATION DATA
To disregard the NEW RAW MINIMUM VALUE, press < Esc >. The
NOTICE:
6. The Analog Calibration Screen is displayed and the value accepted

in Step 5 is displayed on the CALIBRATION MIN line.
7. Enter the value minimum by selecting VALUE MIN from the Analog
Calibration screen and pressing ENTER. The Value Minimum
screen is displayed (Figure 12-4).
The NEW MINIMUM VALUE field lists the default value, “O.O”,in
engineering units, that corresponds with the raw minimum. The
CURRENT MINIMUM VALUE lists either the value minimum from
the previous calibration or the default value minimum of “0.0”.
Figure 12-4. Value Minimum Calibration Screen

WDTOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION ; chaptelr12
MANUAL6040 CALlBRATlON
8. To accept the NEW MINIMUM VALUE default of 0.0, press ENTER.
To enter a different NEW MINIMUM VALUE, type in the new value

and then press ENTER. The following messages are displayed:
NOTICE:
To disregard the NEW MINIMUM VALUE default of 0.0, press

<Esc>. The following message is displayed:
NOTICE
9. The Analog Calibration screen is displayed and the value accepted

in Step 8 is displayed on the CALIBRATION MIN line.
10. Calibrate the raw maximum by setting the sensor to maximum
output and viewing the raw counts displayed next to CURRENT
READING.
11. When the reading stabilizes, or you have a good estimate of what
the maximum reading should be, record the raw sensor maximum
by highlighting RAW MAX and pressing ENTER. The Raw
Maximum Calibration screen is displayed (Figure 12-S).
Figure 12-S. Raw Maximum Calibration Screen

M/D TOTCO
CALIBRATION MANUAL 6&4g
The NEW RAW MAXIMUM VALUE field lists the output, in raw
counts, when RAW MAX was selected, in Step 4. The CURRENT
RAW MAXIMUM VALUE field lists either the raw counts from the
previous calibration or the default maximum raw counts.
12. To accept the NEW RAW MAXIMUM VALUE, press ENTER.
To enter a different NEW RAW MAXIMUM VALUE, type in the

value, up to 6 numbers, and press ENTER. The following
messages are displayed:
NOTICE:
To disregard the NEW RAW MAXIMUM VALUE, press c Esc a.

NOTICE:
13. The Analog Calibration Screen is displayed and the value accepted
in Step 12 is displayed on the CALIBRATION MAX line. .
14. Enter the maximum value by selecting VALUE MAX and pressing
ENTER. The Value Maximum Calibration screen is displayed
(Figure 12-6). The NEW MAXIMUM VALUE field lists the output, in
engineering units, at the time CURRENT MAXIMUM VALUE was
selected. The CURRENT MAXIMUM VALUE field lists either the
value maximum from the previous calibration or the default.
15. To accept the NEW MAXIMUM VALUE of 151.2, press ENTER.

To enter a NEW MAXIMUM VALUE, type in the value and press
ENTER. The following messages are displayed:
NOTICE:

To disregard the NEW MAXIMUM VALUE defautt of 0.0, press
ENTER. The following message is displayed :
NOTICE
REQUESTlNG CALIBRATION DATA
16. The Analog Calibration screen is displayed and the value accepted
in Step 15 is displayed on the CALIBRATION MAX line.
17. When the channel is calibrated, highlight QUIT and press ENTER.
The SYSTEM CALIBRATION SOFTWARE Menu is displayed.

MID TOTCO
I
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION CfuBpter12
MANUAL 60-40 CALIBRATION
Figure 12-6. Value Maximum Calibration Screen

M/D TOTCO
I
Chabter 12 CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATlON

CAilBRATlON MANUAL 6040
12-4 DlGlTAL CHANNEL CALIBRATION

Digital sensors measure events, such as pump strokes. In most cases, one digital output
represents one measured event. For example, one sensor pulse occurs for each pump stroke.
In a few cases, however, one digital sensor output does not represent one measured event. This
occurs when the sensor cannot monitor the desired event directly, and instead monitors an
intermediate process related to the desired event. For example, a sensor cannot measure rotary
table revolutions directly, so it monitors revolutions of the secondary drive of the rotary table. For
each revolution of the secondary drive, one sensor pulse occurs. The secondary drive makes
five revolutions for each rotary table revolution. Thus, five sensor pulses represent one rotary
table revolution.
To calibrate a digital sensor, follow the steps below:
1. Select the digital channel to calibrate, as described in Paragraph
12-2. The Digital SYSTEM CHANNEL CALIBRATION screen is
On this screen, the CURRENT CALIBRATION RATE and the NEW

CALIBRATION RATE fields list either:
- the default number of pulses per unit , which is “1” or
- the&g$s number of pulses per unit, if the channel was previously
NOTE:
Pulses per unit are read as the number of sensor pulses that equal
one measured event, or one engineering unit, for the selected
channel. For example, fiie sensor pulses per rotary table revolution.
2. To accept the NEW CALIBRATION RATE, press ENTER.
To enter a rate that is different from the NEW CALlBRATlON RATE

listed, type in the new value and press ENTER. The following
message is displayed in the upper right:
NOTICE:
To disregard the NEW CALIBRATION RATE, press < Esc >.
3. When the channel is calibrated, highlight QUIT and press ENTER.


M /D TOTCO
I
MANUAL 6MO CALIBRATION
Figure 12-7. Digital Calibration Screen

M/D TOTCO
CALIBRATION MANUAL 604

M/D TOTCO
CHAPTER THIRTEEN
MULTI-DAQ SYSTEMS
13-1 INTRODUCTION
When the 23 analog sensors, 14 digital sensors or 14 output connectors of a System DAQ are
not adequate, additional DAQs can be added to the system. These additional DAQs are called
Slave DAQs. The TOTAL system can support up to three slave DAQs. The main features of
system and slave DAQ’s are summarized in Paragraphs 13-2 and 13-3. Table 13-1 compares
multi-DAQ and single-DAQ processes.
13-2 SYSTEM DAQ

In multi-DAQ systems, the System DAQ controls network communication and performs the same
functions as in single-DAQ systems (Paragraph 2-2-l). Additionally, in a multi-DAQ system, the
System DAQ has the following capabilities:
l polls Slave DAQs for their channel data and places the data on the T-POT network
for use by other system devices.
. is configured for all channels in the system, including Slave DAQ channels
. can use Slave DAQ channel data to calculate values for derived channels
. can output Slave DAQ channel data
13-3 SLAVE DAQ
Like the System DAQ, the Slave DAQ receives and processes raw data from up to 23 analog
sensors and 14 digital sensors and provides output to drive up to 14 instruments. A Slave DAQ
has the following capabilities:
. communicates only with the System DAQ, sending its processed channel data to the
System DAQ when polled.
. is configured only for channels whose sensors are connected to it.
. its output connectors can be used to output processed data from channels whose
sensors are connected to it
August 7,1992 P8ge 13-l

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 13 CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATiON
MULTI-DAQ SYSTEMS MANUAL 604
Table 13-l. Summary of Multi-DAQ Pm
ProCeSS SYSTEM DAQ Slave DAQ
START-UP Same as in Single-DAQ systems, with Same as in Single-DAQ systems,

sitiins 5 and 6 of Dip Switch 2 on the except that positions 5 and 6 of Dip
I?AQ Processor Board both in the ON Switch 2 on the DAQ Processor
positiin (Paragraph 13-4). garr must be properly set (TaMe
- .
:ONFlGURATlOf Same as in Single-DAQ systems, except that CHANNEL. SENSOR & OUTPUT
Slave DAQ channels must be included in the Configuratibn is required in all cases.
System channel list of the System DAQ and ALGORITHM and TEN POINT
configured, in part, at the System DAQ TABLE Configuration may be
(Paragraph 13-5) required.
CALIBRATION Same as in Single-DAQ systems. Same as in Single-DAQ systems.
DIAGNOSTICS Same as in Single-DAQ systems. Same as in Single-DAQ systems.
FLOPPY/DISK Same as in Single-DAQ systems. Same as in Sinale-DAQ svstems.
13-4 START-UP
System and Slave DAQ start-up is same as in single-DAQ systems (Chapter 4). Additionally,
however, you must ensure that the System DAQ is designated as the System DAQ and that each
Slave DAQ is properly designated as Slave DAQ 1 or Slave DAQ 2, etc. To do this, refer to Table
13-2 and adjust positions 5 and 6 of Dip Switch 2 on the DAQ Processor Board accordingly.
Table 13-2. DAQ Dip Switch 2 Settings
I Posltlon 5 I Posltlon 6 I
I System DAQ
I Slave DAQ 1 I
I Slave DAQ 2 I
I Slave DAQ 3 I

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6040 MULTCDAQ SYSTBMS
13-5 RECOMMENDED MULTI-DAQ PROGRAM SEQUENCE

In a multi-DAQ system, each DAQ is configured and calibrated individually. The System channel
list for the System DAQ must include all Slave DAQ channels, whereas the System channel list
for each Slave DAQ must only contain those channels whose sensors are connected to the Slave
DAQ.
The following procedure is recommended for configuring a multi-DAQ system.
A. At the System DAQ:
1. Refer to Figure 3-2 and complete the recommended program

sequence for single-DAQ systems described in Paragraph 3-8.
During Channel Configuration, make sure that:
l the System DAQ System channel list includes all Slave DAQ
channels.
. for Slave DAQ channels, the required fields on the Channel
Configuration screen are completed. The fields crossed out
in Figure 13-1 are not required.
. on the Channel Configuration screen, “SLAVE DAQ” is
selected as the “Sensor type” of Slave DAQ channels.
. if Slave DAQ channel data will be output at the system DAQ,
the pertinent output connector information is entered.
Figure 13-1. SYSTEhUDAQ Channel Configuration Screen

M/D TOTCO
MULTI-DAQ SYSTEMS MANUAL 6090
2. Add a Slave DAQ to the system configuration, as follows:
a. From the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu screen

(Figure 4-2), highlight CONFIGURATION and press ENTER.
The submenu shown in Figure 7-2 is displayed.
b. Highlight SLAVE DAQ and press ENTER. The Slave DAQ

Device screen (Figure 13-2) is displayed.
[UNIT l]
[DELETE]
[ADD1 rrcmm
Figure 13-2. SLAVE DAQ Device Screen
c. Highlight ADD and press ENTER. A Slave DAQ is added to

the system and (UNIT 1) is displayed on the Slave DAQ
Device screen.
d. Repeat Step c, as needed, to add slave DAQ’s.

e. When the necessary slave DAQ’s have been added, press the
c Esc > key or highlight QUIT and press ENTER. The
folbwing message is displayed:’

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 60-40 MULTEDAQ SYSTEMS
csDAQACCEss~ 1
> ATTENTION <

TO THE DAQ?
> OPTIONS <

ABORT
ma
3. Highlight SEND and press ENTER. The necessary configurations

are sent to the DAQ and the Configuration and Calibration Main
Menu screen is displayed.
B. At the slave DAQ:
Figure 13-3 illustrates the recommend Slave DAQ program sequence. Refer to Figure 13-3 and
follow the steps below to configure a Slave DAQ:
1. Determine which connector each channel is assigned to and which

digital connectors, if any, are used for output. (Note that a digital
connector may be used for either input or output, but not for both.)
Record this information on a DAQ Channel Worksheet, like the one
in Appendix A.
2. Highlight CONFIGURATION from the Configuration and Calibration

Main Menu (Figure 4-2) and press ENTER. The submenu in Figure
7-2 is displayed.
3. Highlight SYSTEM/DAQ from the submenu and press ENTER. The

SYSTEM/DAQ CONFIGURATION Menu screen is displayed.
4. Use the CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT options to configure the

Slave DAQ. Make sure that:
a. only channels whose sensors are connected to the Slave DAQ

are included on the Slave DAQ System channel list
b. for each channel, the associated logical channel number is the

same at both the Slave and System DAQ. This is illustrated in
Figures 13-1 and 13-4, where Channel Number 055 is
assigned to Flow Out at both the System and Slave DAQ.
c. for each channel, the pertinent fields on the Channel

Configuration screen are completed. The fields crossed out in
Figure 13-4 are not required at the slave DAQ.
d. the pertinent output connector information is entered, if the
Slave DAQ will be used for output.
3. If an EDMS sensor is part of the system, enter TEN POINT TABLE

CONFIGURATION and create a ten point table (Paragraph 7-6).
August 7,1992 Pags 13-5

M/D TOTCO
Chapter 13 CONFlGURATlON AND CALIBRATIQN
MULTI-DAQ SYSTEMS MANUAL 6Q90
j lnltlalke S;zF Sensor 1
Load Master File from Floppy

(Chapter 5)
Configure the Slave DAQ

(Chapter 7)
4
Channel, Sensor & Output
Configuration
Calibrate Sensor Channels

(Chapter 12)
Run Diagnostics
(Chapter 6)
Save Conflguratlon to Floppy

(Chapter 5)
Figure 13-3. Recommended Program Sequence at Slave DAQ

MID TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Chaptef13
MANUAL 6&40 MULTI-DAQ SYSTEMS
4. Calibrate each sensor channel (Chapter 12).

5. Check to see that the system is properly receiving sensor data by
entering Diagnostics and viewing sensor inputs in raw values and/or
engineering units (Chapter 6).
6. When the system is set up satisfactorily, copy the configurations to

floppy using FLOPPY (Chapter 5).
Figure 13-4. Slave DAQ Channel Configuration Screen

M/D TOTCO
MULTCDAQ SYSTEMS MANUAL W4
Page 13-8 August7,1992

M/D TOTCO
CHAPTER FOURTEEN
DAQ ACCESS
14-1 INTRODUCTION
DAQ ACCESS is used during maintenance to load configurations from the DAQ and send them
to the DAQ. There are two DAQ ACCESS options: [LOAD ALL] and [SEND ALL]. Paragraphs
14-2 and 14-3 describe these options and Figure 14-l illustrates how to use these options.
14-2 LOAD ALL
The LOAD ALL option automatically reads all configurations stored in the DAQ into memory.
[LOAD ALL] is the first step in performing maintenance.
I CAUTION
-1
It is critical that [LOAD ALL] is used before performing maintenance.
Otherwise, configurations might be accidentally overwritten.
To use LOAD ALL, highlight DAQ ACCESS: [LOAD ALL] from the Configuration and Calibration
Main Menu (Figure 4-2) and press ENTER. A series of messages similar to the following are
displayed as, one by one, each system and device configuration is downloaded from the DAQ.
> NOTICE <
REQUESTING CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
When downloading is complete, the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu is displayed.
14-3 SEND ALL
[SEND ALL] automatically sends all configurations in memory to the DAQ. lt is typically used
after maintenance, to send the modified configurations.
CAUTION
During maintenance, do not use [SEND ALL] unless you have done DAQ
ACCESS [LOAD ALL]. Otherwise, configurations stored in the DAQ might
be overwritten with default configurations.
To use SEND ALL, highlight DAQ ACCESS: [SEND AU] from the Configuration and Calibration
Main Menu screen (Figure 4-2) and press ENTER. A series of messages similar to the following
are displayed as, one by one, each system and device configuration is sent to the DAQ.
I ‘NoTcE<
-7
SENDING CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
When all configurations are sent, the Configuration and Calibration Main Menu is displayed.

M/D TOTCO
DAQ ACCESS MANUAL 6Mg
[ DAQ ACCEZF ALL] 1
Perform Maintenance by
Modifying ~*ratkms, as
.
Figure 14-1. How to Use DAQ ACCESS Options

M/D TOTCO
CHAPTER FIFTEEN
MAINTENANCE
15-l INTRODUCTION
This chapter explains how to use the Configuration and Calibration software to update or maintain
a TOTAL system. Maintenance is typically required for the following reasons:
. channels are added to or removed from the system
. one or more devices are added to the system
. sensors are repaired or replaced
15-2 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Maintenance procedures for each of the three cases listed above are illustrated in Figures 15-1
through 15-3.
CAUTION
It is critical that DAQ ACCESS: [LOAD ALL] is performed at the beginning
of all maintenance procedures. Otherwise, configurations may be
accidentally overwritten.

WD TOTCO
MAINTENANCE MANUAL 6090
Select
DAQ ACCESS: [LOAD ALL]
Enter Device Conflguratlon &

Edit Devices Affected by
Netw Channel Conflguratlon
[ DAQ ACC$iD ALL, j
Save to Floppy using

FLOPPY: [SAVE ALL]
Figure 15-l. Maintenance Procedure: Add/Delete Channels

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6040 MAINTENANCE
Select
.
Enter VXC Confl uratlon,
d
Add a VX;C&eeCelect the
*
From the VXC Conflguratlon
Screw, use FLOPPY: [LOAD]
to cop the Conflguratlon for
v 8 x~lntovxc#l
Configure VXC #l by Edltlng

the VXC ~~guratlon, if
select
DAQ ACCESS: [SEND ALL]
Figure 15-2. Maintenance Procedure: Add a VXC Device

M/D TOTCO
MAINTENANCE MANUAL 6040
Select
Enter CALIBRATION and

Calibrate the Sensor
I I
4
Select
DAQ ACCESS: [SEND ALL]
Figure 15-3. Maintenance Procedure: Calibrate a New Sensor

WDTOTCO
APPENDIX A
DAQ CHANNEL WORKSHEET
A-l INTRODUCTION
Complete the DAQ Channel Worksheet by recording analog and digital channel assignments
before initializing the Configuration and Calibration software. Using this worksheet will help
prevent accidental assignment of two channels to the same connector and speed up the
configuration process.
August 7,1992 Paga A-l

MID TOTCO
Appendix A CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
DAQ CHANNEL WORKSHEET MANUAL 604
Page A-2 August 7,1992

M/D TOTCO
DAQ CHANNEL WORKSHEET
DIGITAL CHANNEL IN OUT

JlA JlD[ (11
J2A
J3A
I I I I
J4A J4Dl I I I
JSA
J6A I I 1
J7A J7D( )I/
J8A
J8DH
J9A J9D( I I I
JlOA JlOD
JllA JllD
J12A J12D
J13A J13D
J14A J14D
JlSA
OUTPUT CONNECTORSCALING
J16A
ICONN #( LOW 1
J17A
J D
J18A I I
J D
J19A
JZOA
IJ PDl I I
J D
J2lA
I J-DI I
J22A
J D
J23A
IJ DI I I
I
APPENDIX B
MASTER CHANNEL LISTS
B-l INTRODUCTlON
Table B-1 provides a description of each channel, arranged by logical channel number. For each
channel, Table B-2 lists the defautt sensor type, default algorithm, and the required configured
channels, if any, for the defautt algorithm. For example, the LINES STRUNG channel is required
by the HOOK LOAD algorithm; it LINES STRUNG is not configured, HOOK LOAD cannot be
computed. Refer to Table B-l during configuration to confirm that the proper sensor type and
algorithm is assigned to each channel and that the required channels are configured.
Table El. Channel Descrlptlons
Logical Channel Name Description

Channel #
001 HOOK LOAD The weight on the traveling block hook, in k-lbs’
002 BIT WEIGHT The weight on the bit, in k-lbs
003 ROP MIN/FT The rate of penetration, in minutes per drilled foot
004 BIT TIME The number of hours that the bit has actually been on bottom, as
determined by BIT WEIGHT
005 DEPTH The depth of the hole, in feet
006 BIT POSITION The depth of the bit, in feet
007 TON MILE The accumulated ton-miles on the line
006 DR FT/HR ROP The connection-compensated rate of penetration, in feet per hour
009 DR MVFT ROP The connection-compensated rate of penetration, in minutes per foot
010 BLOCK POSN The position of the block above the rig floor, in feet
011 ROTARY TORQ The motor torque used to drive the rotary table
012 ROTARY RPM The rate at which the rotary table is turning, in RPM
013 JOINT TORQUE The measured drill pipe connection torque, in k-foot pounds
014 ACCUM ROTARY The accumulated rotary table revolutions, in k-revs
015 PK HOOK LOAD The peak (maxirmm) hook bad since this channel was last zeroed
016 PUMP PRESS The mud pump pressure, in PSIG
017 PK ROT TORQ The peak (maximum) rotary torque since this channel was last zeroed
016 ACCUM DRILL The total strokes of all active mud pumps during drilling
August 7,1992 Page B-l

M/D TOTCO
Appendlx B CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATlON
MASTER CHANNEL LIST’S MANUAL 6090
Table B-1. Channel Descriptions (Continued)

Channel #
019 HYDR DISP Currently not used
020 STROKES/FILL The number of pump strokes required to fill the hole after a number of
stands have been pulled during a trip.
021 ACCUM/FILL The total number of pump strokes required to periodically fill the hole
while tripping out
022 PUMP SPM 1 The rate of the first mud pump, in SPM
023 PUMP SPM 2 The rate of the second mud pump, in SPM
024 PUMP SPM 3 The rate of the third mud pump, in SPM
025 PUMP SPM 4 The rate of the fourth mud pump, in SPM
026 TOTAL SPM The combined rate of all active mud pumps, in SPM
027 FILL VOLUME The volume of mud, in barrels, required to fill the hole during a trip
026 ACTUAL FILL The volume of mud, in barrels, required to fill the hole when the drill
pipe is in the hole
032 PUMP COUNT 1 The number of strokes made by the first mud pump
033 PUMP COUNT 2 The number of strokes made by the second mud pump
034 PUMP COUNT 3 The number of strokes made by the third mud pump
035 PUMP COUNT 4 The number of strokes made by the fourth mud pump
036 G/L RATE The rate of gain or loss in the volume of mud monitored by the MUD
VOLUME channel, in barrels per minute
037 GAIN/LOSS The gain or loss in the volume of mud monitored by the MUD
VOLUME channel, in barrels
036 TRIP G/L The total volume of mud gained or bst in all trip tanks
039 RAW TORQUE 1 The raw sensor input, in amps, of the motor torque required to drive
the rotary table
040 RAW RPM 1 The raw sensor input, in RPM, for the rate the rotary table is turning
041 MUD VOLUME The total mud volume, in barrels, in all mud pits except trip tanks
642 PIT VOLUME 1 The volume of mud in Pit 1, in barrels
PIT VOLUME 2 The volume of mud in Pit 2, in barrels
Page B-2 August 7,1992

M/DTGTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Appendix B
MANUAL 6&40 MASTER CHANNEL LISTS
Table B-l. Channel DescriptlOnS(Contlnued)

r
I I
Logical Channel Name Descrlptlon
Channel #
045 1 PIT VOLUME 4 1 The volume of mud in Pit 4, in barrels
047 1 PIT VOLUME 6 ( The volume of mud in Pit 6. in barrels
049 1 PIT VOLUME 6 I The volume of muid in Pit 6, in barrels
051 I PIT VOL 10 I The volume of mud in Pit 10, in barrels
052 PIT VOL 11 The volume of mud in Pit 11, in barrels

I I
053 I PIT VOL 12 I The volume of mud in Pit 12, in barrels
054 I FLOW IN 1 The rate of mud flow into the hole, in gallons per minute
055 FLOW OUT The rate of mud flow leaving the hole, in % of flow line fill volume
056 DENSITY IN The density of mud entering the hole, in pounds per gallon
057 DENSITY OUT The density of mud leaving the hole, in pounds per gallon
056 TEMP IN The temperature of mud entering the hole, in degrees Fahrenheit
059 TEMP OUT The temperature of mud leaving the hole, in degrees Fahrenheit
060 TOTAL GAS The amount of gas encountered during drilling operations
061 H2S The amount of H2S encountered during drilling operations

I I
062 TRIP TANK 1 The volume of mud in the first trip tank, in barrels
063 TRIP TANK 2 The volume of mud in the second trip tank, in barrels
064 TRIP TANK 3 The volume of mud in the third trip tank, in barrels
067 ANN PRESSURE The pressure, in PSIG, at the top of the well annulus
066 ACC PRESSURE The pressure of the BOP accumulator, in PSIG
069 COND OUT The conductiilty of the mud leaving the hole, in mill1siemens per
centimeter
070 CHOKE POSN A measure of the amount that the choke is open, in percent
071 ANN BOP The pressure on the annulus at the BOP stack, in PSIG
August 7,1992 PaOeB-3

M/D TOTCO
Apperrdlx B CONFlGURATlON AND CALlBRATlON
MASlER CHANNEL LISTS MANUAL 6040
Table El. Channel Descrlptlons (Continued)
Logical Channel Name Descrlptlon

Channel #
072 RAM BOP 1 A measure of the amount the BOP Ram 1 is open, in percent
073 RAM BOP 2 A measure of the amount the BOP Ram 2 is open, in percent
074 ROP FlYHOUR The rate of penetration, in feet per hour
077 DRILL DOWN The drill switch to determine if drilling is in progress
078 WASHOUT A value, in units, to measure the probability of a washout, using

PUMP PRESSURE and FLOW IN
079 1OOIDC The inverse of the corrected d-exponent value, multiplied by 100
080 DC EXPONENT The corrected d-exponent value, used to estimate formation pressure!s
083 COST/FOOT The cost per foot of drilling the well
091 TIME The time, in hours and minutes, based upon a 24hour clock
092 DATE The current date
093 RAW TORQUE 2 The raw sensor input, in amps, of the motor torque required to drive
the rotary table
094 RAW RPM 2 The raw sensor input, in RPM, of the rate that the rotary table is
turning
095 BIT START The depth at which drilling resumed, with a new bii
096 OPER COST The cost, in dollars per day, to operate the drill rig
BlT COST The cost of the bit
100 BIT TYPE The type of bii used
101 BIT SIZE The bit dieter, in inches
102 BIT SERNO The serial number of the drill bii
103 DRIFT The angle, in degrees, that the well bore deviates from vertical
104 DRIFT DIR The compass direction in which the well bore deviates from vertical
105 NORM MUD WT The normalized mud weight, in pounds per gallon
106 ACTMUDWT The actual mud weight, Jn pounds per gallon
107 LINES STRUNG The number of lines strung
108 RIG ACTIVITY The current rig activii

WDTOTCO
MANUAL 6040 MASTER CHANNEL LISTS
Table B-l. Channel Descrlptlons(Contlnue4)
Logical Channel Name Descrlptkn

Channel #
110 CASING SHOE The depth of the current casing shoe, in feet
111 DAQ VERSION The version number of DAQ software
112 UNIT 0 VERS The version number of VXC software, it a VXC is part of the system
113 UNIT 1 VERS The software version number of the system device assigned to this
channel during System/DAQ configuration
channel during SystemIDAQ configuration
117 HORN CONTROL The control channel of the audible alarm functions
120 DRILL OFF 1 The RPM value used to run and graph the first dtilloff test
121 DRILL OFF 2 The RPM value used to run and graph the second drilloff test
122 DRILL OFF 3 The RPM value used to run and graph the third drilloff test
123 ‘BIT WEIGHT The filtered BIT WEIGHT used for the drilloff test
124 PIPE STRETCH The pipe stretch, in inches, of the current drill pipe
125 BHA LENGTH The length of the bottom-hole assembly, in feet
126 DP LENGTH The length of the drill pipe, in feet
127 BIT DEPTH The depth of the bit, in feet
128 DEPTH BOUNCE The amount of time that must pass before another “depth pulse” will
be accepted from the sensor
129 DIGIT BOUNCE The amount of time that must pass before another “digit pulse” will be
accepted from the sensor
130 PIT 1 JUMPS The number of times that the mud volume in Pit 1 has changed by at
least ten barrels in less, than one second
131 PIT 2 JUMPS The number of times that the mud volume in Plt 2 has changed by at
least ten barrels in less than one second
August 7,1992 Page B-5

M/D TOTCO
Appendix B CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATlON
MASTER CHANNEL LISTS MANUAL 604
Table B-l. Channel Descrlptlons(Contlnued)
Loglcal Channel Name Descrlptlon

Channel #
133 PIT 4 JUMPS The number of times that the mud volume in Pit 4 has changed by at
142 PUMP DISP #l The volume of mud displaced with each stroke of the first mud pump,
in galbns per stroke
143 PUMP DISP #2 The volume of mud displaced with each stroke of the second mud
pump, in gallons per stroke
144 PUMP DISP #3 The volume of mud displaced with each stroke of the third mud punp,
in gallons per stroke
145 PUMP DISP #I4 The volume of mud displaced with each stroke of the fourth mud
pump, in gallons per stroke
148 PUMP EFFC #l The eff biency of the first mud pump, in percent
147 PUMP EFFC #2 The efficiency of the second mud pump, in percent
148 PUMP EFFC #K3 The efficiency of the third mud pump, in percent
149 PUMP EFFC #I The efficiency of the fourth mud pump, in percent
166 INT DRILLOFF The master channel required to calculate drilbff test channel graphs
l “k” represents 1,000; i.e. 5 k-lbs equals 5,000 lbs

MIDTOTCO
MANUAL 6&4g MASTER CHANNEL USTS
Table B-2. Master Channel List
Loglcal Channel Name Sensor Type Algorithm Required Conflgured

Channel # Channels
001 HOOK LOAD CURRENT HOOK LOAD LINES STRUNG
002 BIT WEIGHT DERIVED BIT WEIGHT HOOK LOAD
003 ROP MIN/FT SLOW RATE ROP - MIN/FT DEPTH
004 BIT TIME DERIVED TIME ON BIT BIT WEIGHT,

ROTARY RPM, TIME
005 DEPTH EVENT DEPTH None
006 BIT POSITION DERIVED BIT POSITION’ --
HOOK LOAD
016 PUMP PRESS CURRENT STD POSITIVE None
017 PK ROT TORQ DERIVED PK ROT TORQ ROTARY TORQ
018 ACCUM DRILL DERIVED ACC DRILL STK All active PUMP
COUNT channels
019 HYDR DISP DERIVED STANDARD ALG None
020 STROKES/FILL DERIVED FILL STROKES FLOW OUT
021 ACCUM/FILL DERIVED ACC FILL STRK FLOW OUT
022 PUMP SPM 1 RATE PUMP RATE None
August 7,1992 Page B-7

MID TOTCO
Table B-2. Msster Channel List (Continued)
Logical Channel Name Sensor Type Algorithm Required Configured

Channel R Channels
026 TOTAL SPM DERIVED TOTAL SPM All active PUMP SPM
channels
027 FILL VOLUME DERIVED STANDARD ALG None
028 ACTUAL FILL DERIVED STANDARD ALG None
032 PUMP COUNT 1 EVENT PUMP EVENT None
036 G/L RATE DERIVED G/L RATE* --
037 GAIN/LOSS DERIVED GAIN LOSS MUD VOLUME
038 TRIP G/L DERIVED TRIP G/L” TRIP TANK 1 and

TRIP TANK 2
039 RAW TORQUE 1 NO SENSOR STD POSITIVE None
040 RAW RPM 1 NO SENSOR RATE None
041 MUD VOLUME DERIVED MUD TOTAL VOL All active PIT
VOLUME channels
042 PIT VOLUME 1 VOLTAGE (0-5V) STANDARD ALG None
PIT VOLUME 5 VOLTAGE (0-5V) STANDARD ALG None
047 PlT VOLUME 6 VOLTAGE (0-5V) STANDARD ALG None
PIT VOLUME 7 VOLTAGE (0-5V) STANDARD ALG None
051 PIT VOL 10 VOLTAGE (0-5V) STANDARD ALG None
Page B-8 August7,1992

MID TOTCO
Table B-2. Master Channel Llst (Contlnued)
Logical Channel Name Sensor Type Algorithm Required Conflgured

Channel # Channels
054 FLOW IN DERIVED CALC FLOW All active PUMP SPM,

PUMP DISP & PUMP
EFFC channels
055 FLOW OUT VOLTAGE (0-5V) STD POSITIVE None
056 DENSITY IN CURRENT STD POSITIVE None
057 DENSITY OUT CURRENT STD POSITIVE None
058 TEMP IN CURRENT STANDARD ALG None
059 TEMP OUT CURRENT STANDARD ALG None
060 TOTAL GAS VOLTAGE (0-5V) STD POSITIVE None
061 H2S NO SENSOR STANDARD ALG None
062 TRIP TANK 1 VOLTAGE (0-5V) STANDARD ALG None
063 TRIP TANK 2 VOLTAGE (0-5V) STANDARD ALG None
064 TRIP TANK 3 VOLTAGE (O-5V) STANDARD ALG None
067 ANN PRESSURE CURRENT STANDARD ALG None
068 ACC PRESSURE NO SENSOR STANDARD ALG None
069 COND OUT NO SENSOR STANDARD ALG None
070 CHOKE POSN NO SENSOR STANDARD ALG None
071 ANN BOP NO SENSOR STANDARD ALG None
072 RAM BOP 1 NO SENSOR STANDARD ALG None
073 RAM BOP 2 NO SENSOR STANDARD ALG None
074 ROP m/HOUR SLOW RATE ROP - FT/HR DEPTH
077 DRILL DOWN VOLTAGE (0-5V) STANDARD ALG None
078 WASHOUT DERIVED , WASHOUT FLOW IN, PUMP

PRESS
079 1oom DERIVED 1OO/DCEXPON NORM MUD WT, ACT

MUD WT, ROTARY
RPM, ROP FT/HOUR,
BIT SIZE, BIT WEIGH1
August 7,1992 Page &9

M/D TOTCO
Appendlx B CONFlGURATlON AND CALIBRATION
MASTER CHANNEL LISTS MANUAL 6Wg
Table B-2. Master Channel List (Continued)
Loglcal Channel Name Sensor Type Algorithm Required Configured

Channel # Channels
080 DC EXPONENT DERIVED DC EXPONENT NORM MUD WT, ACT

MUD WT, ROTARY
RPM, ROP FT/HOUR,
BIT SIZE, BIT WEIGH1
083 COST/FOOT DERIVED DRILL COST TIME, BIT COST,

OPER COST, DEPTH,
BIT START
091 TIME NO SENSOR TIME AND DATE TIME, DATE
092 DATE NO SENSOR TIME AND DATE TIME, DATE
093 RAW TORQUE2 NO SENSOR STD POSITIVE None
094 RAW RPM 2 NO SENSOR l

--
095 BIT START MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
096 I OPER COST MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
I BIT COST I MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
100 I BIT TYPE I MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
101 BIT SIZE MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
102 BIT SERNO MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
103 DRIFT MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
104 DRIFT DIR MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
105 NORM MUD WT MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
106 ACT MUD WT MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
107 LINES STRUNG MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
108 RIG ACTIVITV MANUAL STRING RIG ACT None

I I I
110 CASING SHOE MANUAL VALUE. MANUAL NUMBER None
111 DAQ VERSION MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER .. None
112 UNIT 0 VERS MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
Page El0 August 7.1992

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 6&4g MASTER CHANNEL LISTS
Logical Channel Name Sensor Type Algorithm Required ConfIgured

Channel # Channels
117 HORN CONTROL MANUAL VALUE ALARM ALG TIME, FLOW OUT, All
active PUMP SPM
channels
120 DRILL OFF 1 DERIVED DRL OFF FILTR INT DRILLOFF
123 ‘BIT WEIGHT+ DERIVED TEST BIT WT BIT WEIGHT
124 PIPE STRETCH MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
125 BHA LENGTH MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
126 DP LENGTH DERIVED PIPE LEN ALG DEPTH, BHA LENGTH
127 BIT DEPTH DERIVED BIT DEPTH DEPTH
128 DEPTH BOUNCE MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
129 DIGIT BOUNCE MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
130 PIT 1 JUMPS DERIVED PIT JUMP TIME, All active PIT
VOLUME 8 PIT
JUMPS channels
VOLUME & PIT
JUMPS channels
VOLUME & PIT
’JUMPS channek
VOLUME 8 PIT
JUMPS channels
134 PIT 5 JUMPS DERIVED , PIT JUMP TIME, All active PIT
VOLUME & PIT
JUMPS channels
VOLUME & PIT
JUMPS channels
August 7,1992 Page&11 ’

M/D TOTCO
Appendlx B CONFlGURATlON AND CALlBRATlON
MASTER CHANNEL LISTS MANUAL 6640
Loglcal Channel Name Sensor Type Algorithm Required Configured

Channel # Channels
VOLUME & PIT
JUMPS channels
VOLUME & PIT
JUMPS channek
VOLUME & PIT
JUMPS channels
139 PIT IO JUMPS DERIVED PIT JUMP TIME, All active PIT
VOLUME & PIT
JUMPS channels
VOLUME 8 PIT
JUMPS channels
VOLUME 81PIT
JUMPS channels
142 PUMP DISP #l MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
143 PUMP DISP #2 MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
144 PUMP DISP #3 MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
146 PUMP DISP #I4 MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
146 PUMP EFFC #1 MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
147 PUMP EFFC #I2 MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
148 PUMP EFFC #3 MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
149 PUMP EFFC #I4 MANUAL VALUE MANUAL NUMBER None
160 INT DRILLOFF DERIVED DRILL OFF ALG DP LENGTH, PIPE

STRETCH, TIME, BIT
WEIGHT, ROP
m/HOUR, All active
DRILLOFF channels
l The BIT POSRION, G/L RATE and RAW RPM 2 algorithms are currently under devebpment.
l * The TRIP G/L algorithm currently uses only two t . tank channels: TRIP TANK 1 and TRIP TANK 2; in
future software versions, the algorithm will also use T FrIP TANK 3.
.
Page El2 August 7,lw2
WDTOTCO
APPENDIX C
ALGORITHM MASTER LIST
C-1 INTRODUCTlON
Table C-l lists all available Configuration and Calibration algoriihms, the required configured
channels for each algorithm and the channels that use each algorithm.
Table C-l. Algorithm Master List
Algorithm Required Configured Channels Channels using the Algorithm
STANDARD ALG None HYDR DISP, FILL VOLUME, ACTUAL

FILL, All PIT VOLUME channels, TEMP
IN, TEMP OUT, H2S, All TRIP TANK
channels, ANN PRESSURE, ACC
PRESSURE, COND OUT, CHOKE
POSN, ANN BOP, RAM BOPl, RAM
BOP2, DRILL DOWN
HOOK LOAD I LINES STRUNG I HOOK LOAD
EVENT I None None
DEPTH None DEPTH
PUMP EVENT None All PUMP COUNT channels
TON MILE HOOK LOAD TON MILE
PUMP RATE None All PUMP SPM channels
RATE None ROTARY RPM, RAW RPM 1
ALT HOOK LOAD* -- mm
BIT WEIGHT HOOK LOAD BIT WEIGHT
ACCUM ROTARY BIT WEIGHT ACCUM ROTARY
FILL STROKES FLOW OUT STROKES/FILL
ACC FILL STRK FLOW OUT ACCUM/FILL
ACC DRILL STK All active PUMP COUNT channels ACCUM DRILL
GAIN LOSS MUD VOLUME GAIN/LOSS

4
MUD TOTAL VOL All active PIT VOLUME channels MUD VOLUME
Continued
August 7,1992 Page Gl

M/D TOTCO
Appendix C CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
ALGORITHM MASTER LIST MANUAL 6Mg
Table C-l. Algorithm Master Llst (Continued)
Algorithm Required Configured Channels Channels uslng the Algorithm
MANUAL NUMBER None BIT START, OPER COST, BIT COST,

BIT TYPE, BIT SIZE, BIT SERNO,
DRIFT, DRIFT DIR, NORM MUD WT,
ACT MUD WT, LINES STRUNG,
CASING SHOE, DAQ VERSION, All
UNIT X VERS channels, PIPE
STRETCH, BHA LENGTH, DEPTH
BOUNCE, DIGIT BOUNCE, All PUMP
DISP channels, All PUMP EFFC channels
ALT DEPTH BIT POSITION None
SMART SENSOR None BLOCK POSN
TRIP G/L” TRIP TANK 1 and TRIP TANK 2 TRIP G/L
ROP - FT/HR DEPTH ROP m/HOUR
ROP - MIN/FT DEPTH ROP MIN/FT
TIME ON BIT BIT WEIGHT, ROTARY RPM, BIT TIME

TIME
DC EXPONENT NORM MUD WT, ACT MUD WT, DC EXPONENT

ROTARY RPM, ROP FT/HR, BIT
SIZE, BIT WEIGHT
DRILL OFF ALG DP LENGTH, PIPE STRETCH, INT DRILLOFF

TIME BIE WEIGHT, ROP FTRIR,
All active DRILLOFF channels
AUTO RPM All active RAW RPM channels None
AUTO TORQUE’ -- --
CALC FLOW All active PUMP SPM, PUMP FLOW IN

DISP and PUMP EFFC channels
DRILL COST TIME, BIT COST, OPER COST, COST/FOOT

DEPTH, BIT START
STD POSITIVE None ROTARY TORQ, JOINT TORQUE.

PUMP PRESS, RAW TORQUE 1, FLOW
OUT, DENSITY IN, DENSITY OUT,
TOTAL GAS, RAW TORQUE 2
ALARM ALG TIME, FLOW OUT, All active HORN CONTROL

PUMP SPM channels
EDEPTH ALG BLOCK POSN, DRILL DOWN None
SPC ROP FT/HR TIME, DEPTH None

Continued

M/D1oTc0
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION AppendhC
MANUAL 60-40 ALGORiTHM MASIER LiST
Table Gl. Algorithm Master List (Continued)
Algorithm Required Configured Channels Channels using the Algorithm
SPC ROP MI/f7 I TIME, DEPTH I None
BIT POSITION* 1 me I BIT POSITION
RIG ACT None RIG ACTIVITY
TIME AND DATE TIME, DATE TIME, DATE
TOTAL SPM All active PUMP SPM channels TOTAL SPM
WASHOUT I FLOW IN, PUMP PRESS 1 WASHOUT
PIPE LEN ALG DEPTH, BHA LENGTH DP LENGTH
TEST BIT WT BIT WEIGHT ‘ WEIGHT
BIT DEPTH DEPTH BIT DEPTH
PIT JUMP TIME, All active PIT VOLUME and Ail PIT JUMPS channels
PIT JUMPS channels
DAQ RATE TIME None
DRL OFF FILTR 1 INT DRILLOFF I Ail DRILL OFF channels
DR FT/HR ROP 1 DRILL DOWN, DEPTH 1 DR FT/HR ROP
DR MIN/l=T ROP 1 DRILL DOWN, DEPTH 1 DR Ml/l=T ROP
PK HOOK LOAD HOOK LOAD PK HOOK LOAD
PK ROT TORQ I ROTARY TORQ PK ROT TORQ
1OO/DCEXPON NORM MUD WT, ACT MUD WT, 1oo/Dc

ROTARY RPM, ROP f=T/HR, BIT
SIZE, BIT WEIGHT
LAG DRILL STK FLOW OUT None
l This algorithm is currently under development.

l+ The TRIP GIL algorithm currently uses only two trip tanks: TRIP TANK 1 and TRIP TANK 2; in future
software versions, this algorithm will use TRIP TANK 3 also.
August 7,1992 PaOeC-3

M/D TOTCO
Appendix C CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
ALGORITHM MASTER LIST MANUAL 6&40
Page C-4 August 7,1992

WDTOTCO
APPENDIX D
DRILLOFF CONFIGURATION
D-1 INTRODUCTlON
DRILLOFF is an application of the TOTAL system that enables the operator to view drilbff test
data on a Visulogger XC Graphics Display (VXC) screen as the tests are being conducted.
DRILLOFF also stores files of drilbff test data in the PC Workstation archive (if a PC Workstation
is present) so that the data can be imported to a spreadsheet program and graphed.
This appendix explains how to configure TOTAL systems to run DRILLOFF, which consists of:
. loading the DRILLOFF master file from floppy
. configuring DRILLOFF channels
. configuring DRILLOFF recorders
. configuring DRILLOFF screens
Figure D-l presents an overview of the configuration procedures required to run DRILLOFF.
Note that these procedures differ depending upon whether DRILLOFF is being installed as part of
a new TOTAL system installation or whether it is being added to an existing TOTAL system.
For instructions on viewing drilloff test data on the VXC, refer to Appendix B of Manual 60-20.
D-2 PURPOSE
Drilloff tests are used to select the bit weight and rotary speed (RPM) that result in optimum rate
of penetration (ROP). The tests are typically performed at the top of a rock formation or
whenever ROP changes by a significant amount.
Drilloff test data is displayed as a curve that represents how ROP changes as bit weight changes,
for a fixed rotary speed (Figure D-2). Up to three curves can be plotted on one graph. By
comparing the curves, rigpersonnel can select the optimum bit weight and rotary speed.
D-3 METHOD
A drilloff test is conducted by applying a high bit weigM and drilling at that weight until bottomhole
conditions stabilize, to insure a reasonable starting ROP. At that point, the brake is locked
and the bii continues to drill without further movement of the traveling block. As the bii drills
ahead, bit weight decreases and string tension increases because the drill string is unable to
move downward at the surface. This increase in string tension is used to calculate drill pipe
stretch, which is equal to the distance the bii travels. Pipe stretch is recorded versus time and
converted to ROP, which is then plotted versus a fiftered bit weight, ‘BIT WEIGH (Figure D-2).
Drilloff tests are typically repeated at different rotary speeds and used by rig personnel to selecl
the bii weight and rotary speed that optimize ROP for given rig capabilities, hole and bit
conditions, and depth.
NOTE
Because the brake is locked, the ROP displayed in a drilbff test is a

theoretical ROP calculated from pipe stretch versus time. Actual ROP may
vary from the predictions of the graph.
March 19,1993 Page D-1

M/O TOTCO
Appendix D CONFIGURATION AND CALiBRATlON
DRILLOFF CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6Wg
L-- -- --
i- New TOTAL System 1 r Adding DRILLOFF to 1
Installation Existing TOTAL System
I- -- _--A l- ----- --I
.
Load DRILLOFF Master File Load DRILLOFF Master Flle
from floppy & SEND TO DAQ from floppy & OVERLAY
(Paragraph D-6) (Paragraph D-7)
1
Add DRILLOFF Channels to
SYSTEWDAQ Channel List
& Configure Channels
(Paragraph D-7)
Add DRILLOFF Channels

to VXC Channel List
(Paragraph D-7)
*
create DRILLOFF
Ffecorder Conflgur8Uons
(Paragraphs D-7 b D-9)
I . 1
(5i$i*Q
Figure D-l. DRILLOFF Configuration Overview
Page D-2 March 19,1993

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 60-40 DRILLOFF CON fix:
D-4 THE DRILLOFF SCREEN
A typical DRILLOFF screen is shown in Figure D-2. Up to ten alpha channels can be displayed
on the left side of the screen. These values are updated at a rate of more than once per second.
The DRILLOFF screen can also display three test curves. Each drilloff test curve represents how
ROP changes as ‘BIT WEIGHT changes, for a fixed rotary speed. The rate at which data points
are plotted on the graph is determined by the recorder (Paragraph D-8).
Drilloff tests are initially named DRILLOFF 1, DRILLOFF 2 and DRILLOFF 3, and these names
are displayed above the chart. However, as each test occurs, the test name automatically
changes to reflect the rotary speed at which the test is conducted; the rotary speed is then
displayed above the graph and color-coded to match the associated curve.
A horizontal line is drawn through the names of inactive drilloff tests, as shown in Figure D-2. For
example, when drilloff test 3 is running, a line is drawn through the names of tests 1 and 2.
D-5 THE DRILLOFF MASTER FILE
Because DRILLOFF is an optional application, it requires channels that are not part of the default
channel list of standard TOTAL systems. Likewise, DRILLOFF requires screen and recorder
configurations that are not part of standard systems. Thus, to run DRILLOFF, the drilbff master
file, MASTERDO (Master Drilbff) must be loaded from floppy.
A@ha
Channels
,\;;:.:. ::.,. : .::.:.:...:.:.:::.

hbnu Bar Figure D-2. Typical DRILLOFF Screen
Match 19,1993 Page D-3

M/D TOTCO
Appendix 0 CONFIGURATION AND CALiBRATlOld
DRILLOFF CONFlGURATlON MANUAL 6090
In addition to the standard TOTAL channels and contiguratbns, MASTERDOcontains:

. a default SYSTEM DAQ channel list that includes all DRILLOFF channels
. two default DRILLOFF recorder configurations
. one default DRILLOFF screen configuration.
NOTE
The MASTERDOdefault channel, recorder and screen configurations are

only available if MASTERDO is loaded as part of a new TOTAL system
installation (Paragraph D-6). When MASTERDO is loaded as an addition
to an existing TOTAL system (Paragraph D-7) the default configurations
are overwritten and must be recreated.
Table D-l describes the channels required for DRILLOFF, which are included in the MASTERDO
defautt channel list. Table D-2 lists the MASTERDOdefault recorder and screen configurations.
For complete information on DRILLOFF channels, refer to Appendix B.
Table D-l. Required DRILLOFF Channels

Channel I
001 HOOK LOAD The weight on the traveling block hook, in k-lbs.
002 BIT WEIGHT The weight on the bit, in k-lbs.
005 DEPTH The depth of the hole, in feet.
107 LINES STRUNG The number of lines strung. This is a manually entered value.
120 DRILLOFFl Calculates the values used to plot the ROP curve for the first drilbff test.
121 DRILLOFF Calculates values used to plot the ROP curve for the second drilbff test.
122 DRILLOFF Calculates values used to plot the ROP curve for the third drilbff test.
123 . *BIT WEIGHT The filtered bil weight used for the drilbff test. This value is calculated
using the BIT WEIGHT channel value.
124 PIPE STRETCH The stretch factor of the current drill pipe, in inches per k-lb per 1000
feet. PIPE STRETCH can be configured to be a manually entered value
or to be calculated using the PIPE I.D. and PIPE 0.0. channel values
. and the algorithm named “PIPE STRETCH”.
125 BHA LENGTH The bottomhole assembly length, in feet. This is a manually entered
value.
126 DP LENGTH The length of the drill pipe, in feet. This value is calculated by subtracting
the BHA LENGTH value from the DEPTH value.
156 ‘PIPE I.D. The inner diameter of the drill pipe, in inches. Thii is a manually entered
value.

M/D TOTCO
MANUAL 604 DRILLOFF CONFl%!::
Table D-1. Required DRILLOFF Channels (Contlnued)

Channel #
151 ‘PIPE O.D. The outer diameter of the drill pipe, in inches. This is a manually entered
value.
160 I INT DRILLOFF I The master channel required to calculate drilbff test curves.
l This channel is required only if PIPE STRETCH is a calarlated (derived) channel.
Tabb D-2. MASTERDO Retcorder & Screen Configurations
Recorder
Description Reference
Configuratlon
30K Defines 30 k-lbs as the range of *BIT WEIGHT* values that Paragraph D-6
can be displayed on the horizontal scale of the DRILLOFF
screen chart (i.e., from 30 to 60 K-lbs in Figure D-2).
60K Defines 60 k-lbs as the range of ‘BIT WEIGHT values that Paragraph D-6
can be displayed on the horizontal scale of the DRILLOFF
screen chart (i.e. from 10 to 70 K-lbs).
Screen
Conflguratlon
DRILLOFF Contains the defaufl DRILLOFF alpha and chart channels. Paragraph D-9
D-6 DRILLOFF SETUP & CONFlGURATlON: NEW TOTAL SYSTEM INSTALLATlON
Follow the steps below to set up and configure DRILLOFF if it is part of a new system installation.
1. After system start-up (Chapter 4) use the arrow keys to hghlight
FLOPPY: [LOAD ALL] from the Configuration and Calibration Main
Menu (Figure 4-2) and then press ENTER. A submenu is displayed.
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight MASTERDO and press ENTER.

The folbwing message is displayed:

FROM FLOPPY
> NOTICE <
> OPTIONS <
OVERLAY SEND TO DAQ

MID TOTCO
Appendix 0 CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
DRILLOFF CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6g4
3. Highlight SEND TO DAQ and press ENTER. As shown below, a

series of messages is displayed as, one by one, each master file
and configuration module is sent to the DAQ. This includes the
DRILLOFF default recorder and screen configurations.
> DRIVE ACCESS <

Accessing floppy disk _
then
> NOTICE <
SENDING ALGORITHMS
.
.
.
RETRIEVING PC WORKSTATION #6
FROM FLOPPY
/I SENDING SCREEN CONFIGURATION

’ NoTlCEc 7

4. Use the arrow keys to highlight TOOLS: [CONFIGURATION] and

press ENTER. The submenu shown in Figure 7-2 is displayed.
5. Highlight SYSTEM/DAQ and press ENTER. The SYSTEM/DAQ

Configuration screen (Figure 7-3) is displayed.
6. Highlight CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT: [EDITJ and press

ENTER. A submenu of channels is displayed.
7. Refer to Table D-l and Paragraphs 7-3-8 through 7-3-10 to edit

those channels in Table D-l that are fixed (manual) value channels
and to designate the PIPE STRETCH channel as either manual
value or derived, as the case may be. If PIPE STRETCH is derived,
be sure that the algorithm named “PIPE STRETCH” is selected for
the PIPE STRETCH channel.
8. When all necessary channels have been edited, press c Esc > to
close the CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT: [EDIT] submenu.
Then press < Esc > again to exit SYSTEMIDAQ configuration. The

MID TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Appendlx 0
MANUAL 6640 DRILLOFF CONFIGURATION
/’
I’
A~rLli~=~
I1
> OPTIONS <

SEND ABORT
9. Highlight SEND and press ENTER. Messages are displayed as

configurations are sent to the DAQ. When all configurations have
been sent, the submenu in Figure 7-2 is displayed.
To run a drilloff test using the MASTERDO default configurations,
press < Esc > to close the submenu and then proceed to Step 20.
To edit the default vertical scale values for the DRILLOFF chart,
proceed to Step 10.
NOTE
The vertical chart scales can be edited on the rig at any time,
using the VXC keypad. (See Appendix B of Manual 60-20.)
To edit, add or delete the MASTERDO default recorder and/or

screen configurations, press < Esc > to close the submenu and then
proceed to Step 17.
10. From the submenu in Figure 7-2, highlight VISULOGGER XC
GRAPHICS DISPLAY and press ENTER. The VXC Device screen
(Figure 9-2) is displayed.
11. Highlight [UNIT 0) and press ENTER. The VXC Configuration
12. To edit the DRILLOFF chart vertical scale, highlight DEVICE

CHANNELS: [EDIT] and press ENTER. A submenu is displayed.
13. Highlight DRILL OFF 1 and press ENTER. The Device Channel
14. The Low strip scale field represents the minimum vertical scale
value and High strip scale represents the maximum vertical scale
value. Use the arrow keys to highlight the field to edit, then key-in
the new scale value and press ENTER. The new value is displayed.
15. When the vertical scale is satisfactory, highlight [QUIT] and press
ENTER. The [EDITJ submenu is displayed.
16. Repeat Steps 13 through 15, if needed, to edit the vertical scale for
DRILLOFF 2 or DRILLOFF 3. When all chart scales have been
edited, press < Esc > to close the submenu.
NOTE
All DRILLOFF curves are plotted on the same chart. Thus, if
the defauft chart scale for DRILL OFF 1 is edited, the scales
for DRILL OFF 2 and DRILL OFF 3 should be edited to match.
March 19,1993 Page D=7

MID TOTCO
Appendix 0 CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
DRILLOFF CONFiGURATION MANUAL 6Q90
17a. To add new recorder configurations, delete or edit the MASTERDO

defaull recorder configurations, refer to Paragraph D-8 and
Paragraphs 9-7-l through 9-7-5.
17b. To add new screen configurations, delete or edit the MASTER00
defautt DRILLOFF screen, refer to Paragraph D-9 and Paragraphs
9-6-l 0 through 9-6-l 4.
18. When all recorders and screens have been configured, highlight
[QUIT] from the VXC Device screen (Figure 9-2) and press ENTER.
/ A:::::9~~
> OPTIONS <

SEND ABORT

been sent, the submenu in Figure 7-2 is displayed. Press c Esc >
to close the submenu.
20. Highlight FLOPPY: [SAVE ALL] from the Configuration and

Calibration Main Menu screen (Figure 4-2). The following message
is displayed:
> MENU <
Enter filename: _

configuration files and press ENTER. A series of messages is
displayed as the configuration data is saved. When all
wnfiguratbns have been saved, the Configuration and Calibration
22. Highlight [QUl-r) and press ENTER to exil the Configuration and
Caliibn software.
23. Proceed to Appendix B of Manual 60-20 to run driibff tests.

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Appendix 0
MANUAL 6&40 DRILLOFF CONFlGURATlON
D-7 DRILLOFF SETUP & CONFIGURATiON: ADDING DRILLOFF TO AN EXISTING TOTAL SYSTEM
Follow the steps below to wnfigure DRILLOFF if it is being added to an existing TOTAL system.
1. After system start-up (Chapter 4) use the arrow keys to highlight

FLOPPY: [LOAD ALL] from the Configuration and Calibration Main
Menu (Figure 4-2) and then press ENTER. A submenu is displayed.
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight MASTERDO and press ENTER.


FROM FLOPPY

3. Highlight OVERLAY and press ENTER. As shown below, a series

of messages is displayed as, one by one, each master file and
configuration module is loaded.
RETRIEVING CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

FROM FLOPPY
> DRIVE ACCESS <
> DRIVE ACCESS <

RETRIEVING PC WORKSTATION #O
FROM FLOPPY


M/D TOTCO
Appendlx D CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
DRILLOFF CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6090
4. Highlight DAQ ACCESS: [LOAD ALL] and press ENTER. A series

of messages similar to the following is displayed as, one by one,
each system and device configuration is downloaded from the DAQ.
> NOTICE <
REQUESTING CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

5. Use the arrow keys to highlight TOOLS: [CONFIGURATION] and

press ENTER. The submenu shown in Figure 7-2 is displayed.
6. Highlight SYSTEMDAQ and press ENTER. The SYSTEMDAQ

Configuration Screen (Figure 7-3) is displayed.
7. Highlight CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT [ADD] and press

ENTER. A submenu of channels is displayed. Refer to Table D-l
and add each DRILLOFF channel to the SYSTElWDAQ channel list
as follows: use the arrow keys to highlight the DRILLOFF channel
name and then press ENTER.
8. When all DRILLOFF channels have been added, press < Esc > .
The [ADD] submenu is closed.
9. Highlight CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT [EDITJ and press

ENTER. A submenu of channels is displayed.
10. Refer to Table D-l and Paragraphs 7-3-8 through 7-3-10 to edit
those channels in Table D-l that are fixed (manual) value channels
and to designate the PIPE STRETCH channel as either manual
value or derived. If PIPE STRETCH is derived, be sure that the
algorithm named “PIPE STRETCH” is selected for the PIPE
STRETCH channel.
11. When all necessary channels have been edited, press c Esc .> to
close the CHANNEL, SENSOR, & OUTPUT [EDITJ submenu.
Then press < Esc > again to exit SYSTEMIDAQ configuration. The
> ATTENTION <

TO THE DAQ?
> OPTIONS<
SEND ABORT
12. Highllght SEND and press ENTER. Messages are displayed as

been sent, the submenu in Figure 7-2 is displayed.
Page D-10 Match 19,1993

Mm TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Appendix D
MANUAL 604 DRILLOFF CONFIGURATION
13. Highlight VISULOGGER XC GRAPHICS DISPLAY and press

ENTER; the VXC Device screen (Figure 9-2) is displayed.
14. Highlight [UNIT 0] and press ENTER. The VXC Configuration
Screen is displayed (Figure 9-3).
15. Highlight DEVICE CHANNELS: [ADD] and press ENTER. A
submenu of channels is displayed. Refer to Table D-l and add
each DRILLOFF channel to the VXC channel list as follows: use
the arrow keys to highlight the DRILLOFF channel name and then
press ENTER.
16. When all DRILLOFF channels have been added, press < Esc >.
The submenu is closed.
17. To specify the DRILLOFF chart vertical scale, highlight DEVICE
CHANNELS: [EDITJ and press ENTER. A submenu is displayed.
NOTE
The vertical chart scales can be edited on the rig at any time,
using the VXC keypad. (See Appendix B of Manual 60-20.)
18. Highlight DRILL OFF 1 and press ENTER. The Device Channel
19. The Low strip scale field represents the minimum vertical scale
value and High strip scale represents the maximum vertical scale
value. Use the anow keys to highlight the field to edii, then key-in
the new scale value and press ENTER. The new value is displayed.
M. When the vertical scale is satisfactory, highlight [QURJ and press

ENTER. The [EDITJ submenu is displayed.
21. Repeat Steps 18 through 20, if needed, to edit the vertical scale for
DRILL OFF 2 and DRILL OFF 3. When all chart scales have been
edited, press < Esc > to close the submenu.
NOTE
All DRILLOFF curves are plotted on the same chart. Thus, the
chart scale for DRILL OFF 2 and DRILL OFF 3 must be edited
to match DRILL OFF 1.
22. Create DRILLOFF recorders by highlighting DEVICE

RECORDERS: [ADD] from the VXC Configuration screen and
pressing ENTER. A Recorder Configuration screen like that in
Figure 9-17 is displayed.
23. Refer to Paragraphs g-7-2,9-7-3, D-8 and to Figures D-2, D-3 and
D-4 to configure DRILLOFF recorders. Be sure that all DRILLOFF
recorders are available to the DRILL OFF 1, DRILL OFF 2 and
DRILL OFF 3 channels (see Channels, Paragraph D-8).
24. When all recorders have been configured, highlight [QUIT] and
press ENTER. The VXC Device screen in Figure 9-2 is displayed.
March 19,1993 Page D-l 1

M/D TOTCO
Appendix D CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATlON
DRILLOFF CONflGURATlON MANUAL 6&40
25. Create a DRILLOFF screen by highlighting DEVICE SCREENS:

[ADD] and pressing ENTER. A screen like that in Figure 9-16 is
displayed.
26. Highlight Screen type and press ENTER. A submenu is displayed.
27. Highlight X-Y CHART and press ENTER.
28. Refer to Paragraphs 9-6-11,9-6-l 2, D-9 and to Figures D-2 and D-5
to configure a DRILLOFF screen.
29. When the DRILLOFF screen is configured, highlight [QUITJ and
press ENTER. The VXC Configuration screen is displayed.
30. Highlight [QUIT] and press ENTER; the following message is

displayed:
> ATTENTION c
TO THE DAQ?
> OPTIONS c
SEND ABORT

been sent, the submenu in Figure 7-2 is displayed. Press < Esc >
to close the submenu.
32. Highlight FLOPPY: [SAVE ALL] from the Configuration and

Calibration Main Menu screen (Figure 4-2). The following message
is displayed:
> MENU c
Enter filename: _

configuration files and press ENTER. A series of messages is
displayed as the configuration data is saved. When all
configurations have been saved, the Configuration and Calibration
34. Highlight [QUITJ and press ENTER to exit the Configuration and
35. Proceed to Appendix B of Manual 60-20 to run drilloff tests.

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Appemdlx D
MANUAL -40 DRILLOFF CONFIGURATION
D-8 DRILLOFF RECORDER CONFlGURATlONS
Each DRILLOFF recorder configuration specifies the following:

. the recorder name
. the channel whose data values are used to determine the rate at which data points
are plotted on the drilloff curve (event channel)
l the rate at which data points are plotted on the drilbff curve (update every)
l the maximum value that can be plotted on the chart (do not update past)
. the channels for which the selected recorder can be used.
The DRILLOFF master file, MASTERDO, contains two default DRILLOFF recorder
configurations: 30K CHART and 60K CHART, shown in Figures D-3 and D-4, respectively. The
fields on these screens are summarized below, as they apply to DRILLOFF. If desired, these
defautl screen configurations can be edited by referring to Paragraphs 9-7-l through 9-7-3 and to
the descriptions below.
NOTE
In future software releases, the drilloff chart will be capable of displaying

four drilbff test curves, instead of three, and the field labeled [BLANK] will
be labeled DRILL OFF 4. However, this field is not functional in the current
software and should be ignored.
Recorder name - The recorder name represents the range in ‘BIT WEIGHT values displayed
on the chart. Thus, for the 30K CHART, the difference between the lowest and highest ‘BIT
WEIGHT value displayed is 30 k-lbs and that for the 60K CHART is 60 k-lbs.
Event channel - the channel used to determine the rate at which data points are plotted on the
chart. *BIT WEIGHT’ should always be the event channel for DRILLOFF screens. Each
time the ‘BIT WEIGH value changes by the amount specified in the “Update every” field,
a data point is plotted.
Update every - the quantity, in engineering units, by which the ‘BIT WEIGHT+ value rmst change
before a data point is plotted. This value determines the range in l BlT WEIGHT values
that can be displayed, because each “Update every” unit represents.one pixel on the
.DRILLOFF chart, which can contain 300 ptxels. Thus, the larger the “Update every” value,
the larger the range of data values that can be plotted (Table D-3). In particular:
‘BIT WEIGHT Range = “Update every” x 300
Do not update past -the maximum *BIT WEIGHT value that can be plotted on the right end of
the chart, provided that “Up” is entered in the Direction field on this screen. As TaMe D-3
shows, the value entered in this field, combined with the value in the “Update every” field,
dictate the minimum ‘BIT WEIGHT‘ value displayed.
Direction - This field should always be “Up” for DRfLLOFF screens, so that data values increase
from left to right.
Channels - the channels for which the selected recorder is available. For DRILLOFF
recorders, the only applicable channels are DRILL OFF 1, DRILL OFF 2 and DRILL OFF 3.

M/D TOTCO
Appendix D CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATlON
DRILLOFF CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6&4g
Table D-3. Recorder Conflguraflon Summary

1 I I I
Range of *BIT Default “Do not
Mlnlmum value
Recorder Name Update every WEIGHT* values update past”
dIsplayed
displayed Value
I
l 3OK CHART 0.1 k-lbs 30 k-lbs 50 k-lbs 20 k-lbs
40K CHART 0.133 k-lbs 39.9 k-lbs User-specified “Do not update
past” Value minus
39.9 k-lbs
I
50K CHART 0.166 k-lbs 49.8 k-lbs User-specified “Do not update
past” Value minus
49.8 k-lbs
l 6OK CHART 0.2 k-lbs 60 k-lbs 80 k-lbs 20 k-lbs
l MASTERDO default recorder configuration.
Figure D-3. Default DRILLOFF Recorder Configuration Screen

30K CHART
Page D-14 March 19.1993

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION ’
MANUAL 5040 DRILLOFF CONFi%!ii%::
Figure D-4. Default DRILLOFF Recorder Configuration Screen

60K CHART
D-9 DRILLOFF SCREEN CONFlGURATlON
The DRILLOFF master file, MASTERDO, contains the default DRILLOFF screen configuration
shown in Figure D-5. This default screen configuration is represented by the DRILLOFF screen
in Figure D-2 and contains the following:
l screen name of DRILL OFF
l nine alpha channels (HOOK LOAD through PIPE I.D.)
. three drilbff test curves, each representi a different RPM (DRILL OFF 1 throu h
DRILL OFF 3) displayed on an X-Y CHAR T , with ‘BIT WEIGHT’ plotted on the B -axis
and ROP, in feet per hour, plotted on the Y-axis (Figure D-2)
. Recorder basis (30K CHART in Figure D-5), which specifies the range in the *BIT
WEIGHT values plotted on the chart’s x-axis, in k-lbs.
NOTE
In future software releases, the drilbff chart will be capable of displaying
four drilbff test curves, instead of three, and the field labeled [BLANK] will
be labeled DRILL OFF 4. However, in the current software this field does
not apply and should be ignored.
March 19,1993 Psge D-15

M/D TOTCO
Appendix D CONFIGURATlON AND CALIBRATION
DRILLOFF CONFIGURATION MANUAL 6U4
Figure D-5. Default DRILLOFF Screen Configuration Screen

M/D TOTCO
APPENDIX E
SPECTRUM FUNCTION TYPES
E-l INTRODUCTlON
This appendix is intended to enable experienced technicians to create new function codes to
supplement the codes initially provided with the DSI. It contains a detailed description of
SPECTRUM function types, focusing on how the DSI processes the function code parameters of
base channel, second channel and highlighted channel.
E-2 FUNCTION CODES
As mentioned in Chapter 11, function codes consists of two kinds of information:

. Function type - the action to perform, such as Active/Deactivate Channel
. Related channels - the channels used by the function code, namely, Base Channel,
Second Channel and Highlighted Channel.
E-2-l Function Types
Functions can be grouped into three categories, based upon the input required. The three
categories and their associated functions are listed below.
Category 1 - Functions in this category require no additional input. They are:
. Enable/Disable Channel . Zero Channel Value
l Change Rig Mode . Select DtiWTdp
l Change Gears l Select TD/RT
l Change Fields l Backlighting ON/OFF
l Select One of Two Channels . Start ROP
l Disable/Zero Channel l Ack Depth Alarm
Category 2 - Functions in this category require the operator to enter a floating point value, which
may be a whole number or fraction (decimal points allowed). They are:
l Set Channel High Limit
l Set Channel Low Limit (Positive Value Only)
l Set Channel Low Limit (Negative Value Only)
l Set Channel Value
Category 3 - Functions in this category require the operator to enter a whole number (decimal
points not allowed). They are:
l Set Meter Full Scale Value l Set Active Pit ON/OFF
l Set Resewe Pit ON/OFF , l Set Trip Tank ON/OFF
l Sel Active Pi Volume l Sel Trip Tank Volume
l Set Lines Strung l Set Time
l Set Date
March31,1993 Page E-l

M/D TOTCO
Appendix E CONFIGURATION AND CALlBRATlON
SPECTRUM FUNCTION TYPES MANUAL 6090
E-2-2 Related Channels
Up to three channels (base channel, second channel and highlighted channel) may be required to
perform the action identified by a function code. The typical function of each of these channels is
described below. Note, however, that the channel functions may differ for some function types.
Base Channel - The base channel is typically the DAQ channel that will be affected by the
selected function.
For example:
- if the function type for Function Code 01 is “Enable/Disable Channel” and
- if the base channel is HOOK LOAD
- then enteri function code “01” at the display panel keypad will charge the
HOOK LOA“p, channel from active to inactive, or vice versa.
Second Channel - The second channel is typically a DAQ channel that will be used to perform
the selected function.
For example:
- if two channels share “Field X” on the display panel and
- if the functiin type for Function Code “02” is Select One of Two Channels” and
- if base channel is “Channel A” and second channel is “Channel B”
- then entering function code “02” at the display panel keypad will cha e the
value displayed in “Field X” from that of Channel A to that of Channel3 , or vice
versa.
Hlghllghted Channel - The highlighted channel is a DAQ channel whose data value flashes on
the display panel when the operator enters the associated function code. This
enables the operator to confirm that the correct function code was entered.
In most cases, the highlighted channel is the same as the base channel.
For example:
- if the function type for Function Code “03” is “Zen, Channel Value” and
- ~f~o~E;channel is TOTAL STROKES and the highlighted channel is TOTAL
- then entering function code “03” at the display panel keypad will zero the TOTAL
STROKES channel and the value displayed in the TOTAL STROKES field will
flash.
NOTE
The only case in which the highlighted channel value does not
flash on the display panel is when the highlighted channel is
not represented on the display panel.
Page E-2 March31,1993

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Appendix E
MANUAL 6040 SPECTRUM FUNCTION TYPES
E-3 CATEGORY 1 FUNCWON TYPES
The following paragraphs describe all Category 1 function types. Table 11-2 lists the setup for
each function type.
E-3-l Enable/Disable Channel
Application - Used to change a channel’s “active” flag from active to inactive, or vice versa. A
channel’s “active” flag can be used as follows:
. by an algorithm in the DAQ for decision-making or
. by the display panel software to turn a display panel indicator on and off.
Actkm - When the operator enters the assigned function code, the DSI changes the “active” flag
of the base channel and sends the change to the DAQ.
E-3-2 Change Rlg Mode
Appllcatlon - Can be used as follows:

l ~kh;~~~rn Drill Mode to Trip Mode to Standby Mode by entering the assigned
. The manual value of the base channel can be used by an algorithm in the DAQ for
decision-making.
l The base channel can be des’ nated as an attribute channel for the associated
SPECTRUM channel status ( B ara mph 11-l O-3-1). In this case, the manual value is
used as a status byte for the SPE e TRUM channel and, as such, can be used to turn
display panel indiitors on and off.
Action - When the operator enters the assigned function code:
1. The DSI tests the base channel manual value and changes this
value from 1 to 2, from 2 to 4 or from 4 to 1.
2. The DSI sends the new value to the display panel. The display
panel software uses this value to determine which rig mode
indicator to light, as follows: Drill Mode = manual value of 1, Trip
Mode = manual value of 2, Standby Mode = manual value of 4.
3. The new value is sent to the DAQ for algorithm update.
NOTE
Forthisfunction type, the base channel must be a manual value
channel with an initial value of 1, 2 or 4.
March31,1993 Page E-3

M/D TOTCO
Appendix E CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
SPECTRUM FUNCTION TYPES MANUAL 6040
E-3-3 Change Geam

Appllcatbn - Used to change the gear displayed from “low” to “high”, or vice versa. Used when
the system has both a two-gear top drive and a two-gear rotary table and when the TD
GEAR and RT GEAR channels share a display field.

1. The DSI tests the “active” flag of the base channel.
2. If the base channel is active, the DSI changes the manual value of
the second channel from 2 to 4 or from 4 to 2.
If the base channel is inactive, the DSI changes the manual value of
the highlighted channel from 2 to 4, or 4 to 2.
3. The DSI sends the new value to the display panel and the display
panel software uses the value to determine which gear to display,
as follows: 2 = low gear, 4 = high gear.
4. The DSI sends the new value to the DAQ, for algorithm update.
The flowchart in Figure E-l outlines the “Change Gears” logic.
NOTE
Both the second and highlighted channels must be manual
value channels, with initial values of 2 or 4.
E-3-4 Change Fields
Application - None at this time. Originally intended for a top drive or rotary table with motor
having three selectable excitation fields.
CAUTION
Do not use the “Change Fields” function type, as it is not totally
developed and may be modified at any time.
Action - When the operator enters the assigned function code
1. The DSI tests the base channel manual value and changes this
value from 4 to 2, from 2 to 1 or from 1 to 4.
2. The DSI sends the new value to the display panel. The display
panel software uses this value to determine which indicator to light.
3. The new value is sent to the DAQ, for algorithm update.
NOTE
Forthisfunctiontype, thebasechannel mustbeamanualvalue
channel with an initial value of 1‘2 or 4.
Page E-4 March 31,1993

MIDTOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION Appendlx E
MANUAL 6&4g SPECTRUM FUNCTION TYPES
DSI tests base channel

%ctlve flag.
I-- 1-1 --- 1 1

Base channel active Base channel inactive
L- I- --I
T-l
DSI than es manual value of
hlghllght e3 channel from 2 to 4,
or from 4 to 2, and sends new
value to DAQ. ti value to DAQ.
Old base channel value set Old base channel value set
equal to new second channel equal to new hlghll hted
value In DSI. channel value In 8 SI.
1 I I I
DSI sends new base channel DSI sends new base channel
value to display panel. value to d&play panel.
DN@aypanelsottwareuses
new base channel value to light
appropriate gear Indicator.
Channel Betup:
TD/Rl SELECT Change

= Base channel
TD GEAR I Second channel ”
RT GEAR I HIghlIghted channel
Figure E-l. Logic: “ Gears Function Type
March 31,1393 Page E-5

M/D TOTCO
Appendix E CONFIGURATiON AND CALiBRAliON
SPECTRUM FUNCTlON TYPES MANUAL 604
E-3-5 Select One of Two Channels

Application - Used to select the channel whose data is displayed, when two channels share a
display field.
Actlon - When the operator enters the assigned function code:
1. The DSI changes the “active” flags of the base and second
channels.
2. The DSI sends these changes to the DAQ, for algorithm update.
3. The DSI tests the base channel “active” flag.
If the base channel is active, the highligMed channel value is set
equal to the base channel value.
If the base channel is inactive, the HighligMed channel value is set
equal to the second channel value.
4. The value of the highligMed channel is sent to the display.
NOTE
During initial TOTAL system configuration, the “active” flag of
the base channel must be opposite that of the second channel.
In other words, if the base channel is active, the second
channel must be inactive, and vice versa.
E-3-6 DlsableIZem Channel
Appllcatlon - Used to activate/ deactivate pump stroke counter channels or other “event”
channels.
1. The DSI changes the “active” flag of the base channel and sends
the change to the DAQ for algorithm update.
2. The DSI tests the “active” flag of the base channel.

If the base channel is inactive, the algorithm in the DAQ stops
counting.
If the base channel is active:

a. The DSI changes the base channel value to zero, and sends
this change to the DAQ.
b. The algorithm in the DAQ starts counting from zero.

M/D TOTCO
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION AppemdlxE _
MANUAL 60-40 SPECTRUM FUNCTION TYPES
E-3-7 Zero Channel Value
Application - Used to zero a channel value.
1. The DSI changes the base channel value to zero.
2. The DSI sends this change to the DAQ.
3. The DSI sends the zeroed data values to the display.
E-3-8 Select DrllUTrip
Appllcatlon - Currently used as follows:

l To change the display from Drill Mode to Trip Out Mode to Trip In Mode.
. When both Top Drive and Rotary Table systems are present and only one of them
has two gears, this function type is used to change the display from the single-gear
system, to high gear of the two-gear system, to bw gear of the two-gear system.
NOTE
The base channel must be a manual value channel with one
of the following initial settings: “active and 0”, or “inactive and
4”, or “inactive and 2”.
Action - When the operator enters the assigned function code, the DSI tests the base channel
“active” flag.
If the base channel is active:
1. The base channel is changed to inactive.
2. The base channel manual value is changed to 4.
3. These changes are sent to the display panel and used by the
display panel software to light the appropriate indiiors (Table E-l).
4. These changes are sent to the DAQ, for algorithm update.
If the base channel is inactive, its value is tested.
If the base channel value is 4:
2. This change is sent to the display panel and used by the display
panel software to light the appropriate indicators (Table E-l).
3. The new manual value is sent to the DAQ for algorithm update.

M/D TOTCO
Appendix E CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATiON
SPECTRUM FUNCTION TYPES MANUAL 6&4g
If the base channel value is 2:
1. The base channel is changed to active.

3. These changes are sent to the display panel and used by the
display panel software to light the appropriate indicators (Table E-l).
4. These changes are sent to the DAQ, for algorithm update.
Table E-l. Active Flags and Manual Values for Select Drill/Trip
Active Flag/Manual Value Representative Rlg Mode Repmsentatlve Gear/Gear System
Active and 0 Drill Mode The Single-Gear System
Inactive and 4 Trip Out Mode High Gear of the Two-Gear System
Inactive and 2 Trip In Mode Low Gear of the Two-Gear System
E-3-9 Select TD/RT

Appllcatlon - When both a two-gear top drive and two-gear rotary table system are present, this
function type is used to change the system represented on the display.
NOTE
The base, second and highlighted channels must all be manual
value channels and must all be set to 2.
Action - When the function code is entered:

1. The DSI changes the “active” flag of the base channel and sends
thii change to the DAQ, for algorithm update.
2. If the base channel is now active, the DSI sends the value of the
second channel to the display. If the base channel is now inactive,
the DSI sends the value of the highlighted channel to the display.
3. The display panel software uses the base channel “active” flag and
manual value of the second or highlighted channel to determine
which display indicators to lffht, as follows:
. Base channel active = top drive,
l Base channel inactive = rotary table
l SecondIhighligMed channel manual value of 2 = low gear
. Second/highlighted channel manual value of 4 = high gear.

MID TOTCO
E-3-10 Start ROP

Appllcatlon - Used to change the displayed ROP value from “0” to the numerical ROP value, or
vice versa, for the following:
. a system with one ROP function, either ROP FDHR or ROP MINFT
. a system in which two ROP functions (ROP FTiHR and ROP MIN/FT) share a display
field.
1. The DSI tests the AUTO ROP channel and, if it is active, the DSI
changes it to inactive and sends this change to the DAQ, for
algorithm update.
NOTE
If present, AUTO ROP must be assigned to DAQ logical
channel number 228. No other channel should be assigned to
channel 228, under any circumstance.
2. The DSI changes the highlighted channel’s “active” flag and sends
this change to the DAQ.
3. The DSI tests the “active” flag of the highlighted channel.
If the highlighted channel is now inactive, the highlighted channel
value is set to zero and this value is sent to the display.
If the highlighted channel is now active, the DSI tests the second
channel “active” flag.
a. If the second channel is active, the highlighted channel is set

equal to the second channel.
b. If the second channel is inactive, or if the second channel is

not assigned, then the highlighted channel is set equal to the
base channel.
4. The value of the highlighted channel is sent to the display.
The flowchart in Figure E-2 outlines the “Start ROP” logic.
E-3-11 Backllghtlng On/Off

Appllcatlon - Used to turn display panel backlighting on and off.
Action - When the operator enters the assignedfunction code, Sit 4 (of O-7) on parallel port
PI01 -A is changed. This supplies an output which turns display panel backlighting on or off.

M/D TOTCO
Appendix E CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATlON
SPECTRUM FUNCTION TYPES MANUAL 6Mg
DSI changes highlighted

channel **active” flag and
sends change to DAQ.
7 - L--
I
Hlghllghtk$~hanneI ’
I- - I
l---
I
1
Hlghllghted channel
value set to xero and
senttodl! My panel.
I
1
1--
l I I Second channel lnactlve 1
Second channel active
I- - - J .L - -
or not assigned
1
T T
DSI sets tilghllghted
channel value equal to
second channel value.
I
I
I I
DSI sends
channel value to
Channel Setup: ROP t Hlghllghted channel

ROP MIN/FT P Second channel
ROP FTlHR P Base channel
Figure E-2. Logic: “Start ROP” Function Type

ROP FT/HR and ROP MWFT Share a Display Field

MID TOTCO
MANUAL 6WO SPECTRUM FUNCTlON TYPES
E-3-12 Ack Depth Alaann
Pufpose~ - The displayed DEPTH channel value flashes and the alarm sounds when the DEPTH
channel value passes through a depth setpoint. This function type stops the DEPTH value
from flashing and turns the alarm horn off, provided no other channel is in alann.
NOTE
Each depth setpoint is a DAQ manual value channel. Sii
setpoints are allowed.
Action - When the operator enters the assigned function code, the DSI clears the local alarm flag
for the DEPTH channel and the DEPTH channel value stops flashing. Then, if no other
channel is in alarm, the DSI turns the alarm horn off.
E-4 CATEGORY 2 FUNCTlON TYPES
Application - Category 2 function types are used to change the high limtt, low limit or current
data value of any channel to an operator-entered value. The Category 2 function types are:
l Set Channel High Limit
. Set Channel Low Limit (Positive Value Only)
l Set Channel Low Limit (Negative Value Only)
l Set Channel Value
Table 11-2 lists the setup for each function type.
Action - When the operator enters the assigned function code and new limit or channel value, the
base channel value is replaced by the new value. The DSI sends the new value to the DAQ
and to the display panel.
E-5 CATEGORY 3 FUNCTlON TYPES
The following paragraphs describe Category 3 function types. Table 11-2 lists the setup for each
function type.
E-51 Set Meter Full Scale Value
Appllcatlon - Used to change the maximum data (full-scale) value that can be displayed on
a meter to an operator-entered value.
Action - When the operator enters the assigned function code and new full-scale value, the DSI
checks to see if the new value is valid. Valid values are:
l Whole-number multiples of ten between 10 and 190
. Whole-number multiples of 100 between 200 and 1,900
l Whole-number multiples of 1,000 between 2,000 and 19,000
. Whole-number multiples of 10,000 between 20,000 and 90,000.
If the new value is not valid, ERROR is displayed. Otherwise, the new value replaces the
old base and highlighted channel values. Then the DSI sends the new value to the DAQ
and to the display panel.
March 31,1993 Page E-l 1

MID TOTCO
-
Appendlx E CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
SPECTRUM FUNCTlON TYPES MANUAL 60-40
E-52 Set Active Pit/Reserve PtUTrlp Tank On/Off
Appllcatlon - These three Category 3 function types are used to turn on or off the volume
channels listed below.
. Actiie Pit - the “Set Active Pit On/Off” function type
l Reserve Pit -the “Set Reserve Pit On/Off” function type
l Trip Tank - the “Set Trip Tank OnQff” function type.
If a channel is on, it is used to calculate values for related total volume channels; if a
channel is off, it is not used for any total volume channel calculations.
Action - When the operator enters the assigned function code and DAQ logical channel number
(see Table 11-l) of a volume channel, the DSI changes the channel’s “active” flag and
sends this change to the DAQ, for algorithm update. The DSI then adjusts the value of the
affected “total volume” channel (namely, MUD VOLUME and GAIN/LOSS channels if an
active pit is turned on or off, TOTAL RESERVE VOLUME for a reserve pit or TOTAL TRIP
VOLUME for a trip tank) and sends the adjusted value to the display.
E-5-3 Sel Active Plt Volume

Appllcatlon - Used to display the pit number and volume of an operator-specified mud pit. The
pit volume is typically displayed in a field called TANK VOLUME.
NOTE
The highlighted channel must be a manual value channel
whose initial value equals a valid mud pit number.
Action - The operator enters the assigned function code and pit number of the mud pit to display.
The DSI changes the “active” flag of the highlighted channel to active and the manual value
of the highlighted channel to the operator-entered pit number and sends these changes to
the DAQ, for algorithm update. The DSI then sends the pit volume (base channel value)
and pit number (highlighted channel value) to the display.
NOTE
The “actiie” flag of the TANK NUMBER channel detemines
whether mud pit volume or trip tank volume is displayed. If
TANK NUMBER is active, mud pit volume is displayed; if
inactive, trip tank volume is displayed.
Pa9e E-l 2 March 31,1993

M/D TOTCO
E-6-4 Sel Ttlp Tank Volume
Application - Used to display the tank number and volume of an operator-specified trip tank.
The tank volume is typically displayed in a field called TANK VOLUME.
I NOTE ----I
The highlighted channel must be a manual value channel
whose initial value equals a valid trip tank number.
Action - The operator enters the assigned function code and tank number of the trip tank to
display. The DSI changes the “active” flag of the highlighted channel to inactive and the
manual value of the highlighted channel to the operator-entered tank number and sends
these changes to the DAQ, for algorithm update. The DSI then sends the tank volume
(base channel value) and tank number (highlighted channel value) to the display.
NOTE
The “active” flag of the TANK NUMBER channel determines
whether mud pit volume or trip tank volume is displayed. If
TANK NUMBER is active, mud pit volume is displayed; if
inactive, trip tank volume is displayed.
E-5-5 Set Lines Sttung
Application - Used to change the displayed “Lines Strung” value to an operator-entered value.
Action - When the operator enters the assigned function code and number of lines strung, the
DSI tests the number entered. If it is 1, or an even number between 2 and 50, the base
channel value is changed to the operator-entered number. The DSI sends the new value to
the DAQ and to the display panel. If the operator-entered number is not 1, or an even
number between 2 and 50, ERROR is displayed.
I NOTE I
The base channel must be a manual value channel with.an
initial value equal to a valid number of lines strung.
E-6-6 Set Time/Set Date
Appllcatlon - These two function types are used to change the displayed time or date to an
operator-entered value.
Action - When the operator enters the assigned function code and time or date, the entered
value is sent to the DAQ and to the display.
I
NOTE
Time must be entered as HHMM and date must be entered as
MMDDYY.

M/D TOTCO
Appendlx E CONFlQURATlON AND CALlBRATlON
SPECTRUM FUNCTION TYPES MANUAL 60-40
Page E-14 Mach 31,1993

M/D TOTCO

Part Number 60-40 Configuration & Calibration Software

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part Number 60-40 Configuration & Calibration Software

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part Number 60-40

START-UP, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE

Manufacturers of Precision Instruments

Printed in U.S.A. March 31, 1993

Cover.. ......................................................... Mar 1993

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

CHAPTER ONE - INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER TWO - TOTAL SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CHAPTER THREE - DESCRIPTION

3-4-9 The MASTER.030 File ......................................... 3-6

CHAPTER FOUR - START-UP

CHAPTER FIVE - FLOPPY/DISK

5-l INTRODUCTION ................................................ 5-l

CHAPTER SIX - DIAGNOSTICS

6-l INTRODUCTION ................................................ 6-l

CHAPTER SEVEN - INITIAL SYSTEWDAQ CONFlGURATlON

7-5-2 Delete Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................ 7-15

CHAPTER EIGHT - INlTlAL TlM CONFlGURATlON

CHAPTER NINE - INlTlAL VXC CONFlGURATlON

9-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................ 9-1

CHAPTER TEN - INITIAL PCW CONFlGURATlON

10-l INTRODUCTION ............................................... 10-l

CHAPTER ELEVEN - INlTlAL DSI CONFlGURATlON

11-4 SPECTRUM CHANNEL CONFIGURATIONS ........................ 11-4

CHAPTER TWELVE - CALIBRATION

12-1 INTRODUCTION ............................................... 12-1

CHAPTER THIRTEEN - MULTI-DAQ SYSTEMS

13-1 INTRODUCTtON ............................................... 13-1

March 31,1993 Vii

CHAPTER FOURTEEN - DAQ ACCESS

CHAPTER FIFTEEN - MAINTENANCE

15-l INTRODUCTION ............................................... 15-1

APPENDIX A - DAQ CHANNEL WORKSHEET

A-l INTRODUCTION ................................................ A-l

APPENDIX B - MASTER CHANNEL LISTS

B-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................ B-l

APPENDIX C - ALGORITHM MASTER LIST

APPENDIX D - DRILLOFF CONFlGURATlON

VIII March 31,1993

APPENDIX E - SPECTRUM FUNCTION TYPES

E-l INTRODUCTION ................................................ E-l

2-l TOTAL System Overview ......................................... 2-1

4-1 Default/Command Modifier Screen .................................. 4-2

5-l FLOPPY:[LOAD ALL] Menu Screen ................................. 5-2

6-l DIAGNOSTICS Menu Screen ...................................... 6-2

7-1 lnftial SystemIDAQ Configuration Procedure .......................... 7-2

8-l Initial TIM Configuration Procedure .................................. 8-2

9-l Initial VXC Configuration Procedure ................................. 9-2

1 o-1 Initial PCW Configuration Procedure ............................... 1O-2

10-12 THREE-COLUMN Plot Configuration Screen ........................ 10-l 7

11-l DSI Configuration Procedure ..................................... 11-2

12-l SYSTEM CALIBRATION SOFTWARE Screen ........................ 12-l

13-1 SYSTEMDAQ Channel Configuration Screen ......................... 13-3

14-1 How to Use DAQ ACCESS Options ................................ 14-2

15-1 Maintenance Procedure: Add/Delete Channels ....................... 15-2

D-l DRILLOFF Configuration Overview ................................. D-2

E-l Logic: “Change Gears” Function Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

2-1 TOTAL System Device Distribution .................................. 2-3

3-1 Configuration & Calibration Files .................................... 3-2

5-l FLOPPY/DISK Options ........................................... 5-l

6-1 DIAGNOSTICS F-Key Summary ................................... 6-l

7-l Summary of Sensor Types ....................................... 7-10

9-1 VXCScreenTypes ........................................... ..9-11